2004-03-01 17:47:27 +00:00
< !DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd">
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< html >
< head >
< title > LLVM Assembly Language Reference Manual< / title >
2004-08-26 20:44:00 +00:00
< meta http-equiv = "Content-Type" content = "text/html; charset=utf-8" >
< meta name = "author" content = "Chris Lattner" >
< meta name = "description"
content="LLVM Assembly Language Reference Manual.">
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< link rel = "stylesheet" href = "llvm.css" type = "text/css" >
< / head >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< body >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_title" > LLVM Language Reference Manual < / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< ol >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#abstract" > Abstract< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#introduction" > Introduction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#identifiers" > Identifiers< / a > < / li >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#highlevel" > High Level Structure< / a >
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#modulestructure" > Module Structure< / a > < / li >
2009-07-20 01:03:30 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#linkage" > Linkage Types< / a >
< ol >
2009-07-20 02:41:50 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#linkage_private" > '< tt > private< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_linker_private" > '< tt > linker_private< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_internal" > '< tt > internal< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_available_externally" > '< tt > available_externally< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_linkonce" > '< tt > linkonce< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_common" > '< tt > common< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_weak" > '< tt > weak< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_appending" > '< tt > appending< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_externweak" > '< tt > extern_weak< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
2009-10-10 18:26:06 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#linkage_linkonce_odr" > '< tt > linkonce_odr< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
2009-07-20 02:41:50 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#linkage_weak" > '< tt > weak_odr< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_external" > '< tt > externally visible< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_dllimport" > '< tt > dllimport< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#linkage_dllexport" > '< tt > dllexport< / tt > ' Linkage< / a > < / li >
2009-07-20 01:03:30 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#callingconv" > Calling Conventions< / a > < / li >
2009-01-11 20:53:49 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#namedtypes" > Named Types< / a > < / li >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#globalvars" > Global Variables< / a > < / li >
2006-01-23 23:23:47 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#functionstructure" > Functions< / a > < / li >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#aliasstructure" > Aliases< / a > < / li >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#paramattrs" > Parameter Attributes< / a > < / li >
2008-09-26 23:51:19 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#fnattrs" > Function Attributes< / a > < / li >
2007-12-10 03:18:06 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#gc" > Garbage Collector Names< / a > < / li >
2006-01-23 23:23:47 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#moduleasm" > Module-Level Inline Assembly< / a > < / li >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#datalayout" > Data Layout< / a > < / li >
2009-07-27 18:07:55 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#pointeraliasing" > Pointer Aliasing Rules< / a > < / li >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#typesystem" > Type System< / a >
< ol >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_classifications" > Type Classifications< / a > < / li >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_primitive" > Primitive Types< / a >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< ol >
2009-09-27 00:45:11 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_integer" > Integer Type< / a > < / li >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_floating" > Floating Point Types< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#t_void" > Void Type< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#t_label" > Label Type< / a > < / li >
2009-05-30 05:06:04 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_metadata" > Metadata Type< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_derived" > Derived Types< / a >
< ol >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_array" > Array Type< / a > < / li >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_function" > Function Type< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#t_pointer" > Pointer Type< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_struct" > Structure Type< / a > < / li >
2006-12-08 17:13:00 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_pstruct" > Packed Structure Type< / a > < / li >
2007-02-15 03:07:05 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_vector" > Vector Type< / a > < / li >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_opaque" > Opaque Type< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2009-02-02 07:32:36 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#t_uprefs" > Type Up-references< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#constants" > Constants< / a >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< ol >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#simpleconstants" > Simple Constants< / a > < / li >
2009-02-28 18:32:25 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#complexconstants" > Complex Constants< / a > < / li >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#globalconstants" > Global Variable and Function Addresses< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#undefvalues" > Undefined Values< / a > < / li >
2009-10-27 21:19:13 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#blockaddress" > Addresses of Basic Blocks< / a > < / li >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#constantexprs" > Constant Expressions< / a > < / li >
2009-04-04 07:22:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#metadata" > Embedded Metadata< / a > < / li >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / ol >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / li >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#othervalues" > Other Values< / a >
< ol >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#inlineasm" > Inline Assembler Expressions< / a > < / li >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2009-07-20 05:55:19 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#intrinsic_globals" > Intrinsic Global Variables< / a >
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#intg_used" > The '< tt > llvm.used< / tt > ' Global Variable< / a > < / li >
2009-07-20 06:14:25 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#intg_compiler_used" > The '< tt > llvm.compiler.used< / tt > '
Global Variable< / a > < / li >
2009-07-20 05:55:19 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#intg_global_ctors" > The '< tt > llvm.global_ctors< / tt > '
Global Variable< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#intg_global_dtors" > The '< tt > llvm.global_dtors< / tt > '
Global Variable< / a > < / li >
< / ol >
< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#instref" > Instruction Reference< / a >
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#terminators" > Terminator Instructions< / a >
< ol >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_ret" > '< tt > ret< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_br" > '< tt > br< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_switch" > '< tt > switch< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2009-10-28 00:19:10 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_indirectbr" > '< tt > indirectbr< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_invoke" > '< tt > invoke< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_unwind" > '< tt > unwind< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_unreachable" > '< tt > unreachable< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#binaryops" > Binary Operations< / a >
< ol >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_add" > '< tt > add< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_fadd" > '< tt > fadd< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_sub" > '< tt > sub< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_fsub" > '< tt > fsub< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_mul" > '< tt > mul< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_fmul" > '< tt > fmul< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_udiv" > '< tt > udiv< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_sdiv" > '< tt > sdiv< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_fdiv" > '< tt > fdiv< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_urem" > '< tt > urem< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_srem" > '< tt > srem< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_frem" > '< tt > frem< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#bitwiseops" > Bitwise Binary Operations< / a >
< ol >
2007-02-02 13:57:07 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_shl" > '< tt > shl< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_lshr" > '< tt > lshr< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_ashr" > '< tt > ashr< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_and" > '< tt > and< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_or" > '< tt > or< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_xor" > '< tt > xor< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#vectorops" > Vector Operations< / a >
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#i_extractelement" > '< tt > extractelement< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_insertelement" > '< tt > insertelement< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_shufflevector" > '< tt > shufflevector< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< / ol >
< / li >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#aggregateops" > Aggregate Operations< / a >
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#i_extractvalue" > '< tt > extractvalue< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_insertvalue" > '< tt > insertvalue< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< / ol >
< / li >
2006-08-15 00:45:58 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#memoryops" > Memory Access and Addressing Operations< / a >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< ol >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_alloca" > '< tt > alloca< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_load" > '< tt > load< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_store" > '< tt > store< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > '< tt > getelementptr< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#convertops" > Conversion Operations< / a >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#i_trunc" > '< tt > trunc .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_zext" > '< tt > zext .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_sext" > '< tt > sext .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_fptrunc" > '< tt > fptrunc .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_fpext" > '< tt > fpext .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_fptoui" > '< tt > fptoui .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_fptosi" > '< tt > fptosi .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_uitofp" > '< tt > uitofp .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_sitofp" > '< tt > sitofp .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_ptrtoint" > '< tt > ptrtoint .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_inttoptr" > '< tt > inttoptr .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2006-11-11 23:08:07 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_bitcast" > '< tt > bitcast .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / ol >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#otherops" > Other Operations< / a >
< ol >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_icmp" > '< tt > icmp< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#i_fcmp" > '< tt > fcmp< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_phi" > '< tt > phi< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2004-03-12 05:50:16 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_select" > '< tt > select< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_call" > '< tt > call< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2006-01-13 23:26:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#i_va_arg" > '< tt > va_arg< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / ol >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / ol >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / li >
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#intrinsics" > Intrinsic Functions< / a >
< ol >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_varargs" > Variable Argument Handling Intrinsics< / a >
< ol >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_va_start" > '< tt > llvm.va_start< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_va_end" > '< tt > llvm.va_end< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_va_copy" > '< tt > llvm.va_copy< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_gc" > Accurate Garbage Collection Intrinsics< / a >
< ol >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_gcroot" > '< tt > llvm.gcroot< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_gcread" > '< tt > llvm.gcread< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_gcwrite" > '< tt > llvm.gcwrite< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_codegen" > Code Generator Intrinsics< / a >
< ol >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_returnaddress" > '< tt > llvm.returnaddress< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_frameaddress" > '< tt > llvm.frameaddress< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_stacksave" > '< tt > llvm.stacksave< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_stackrestore" > '< tt > llvm.stackrestore< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_prefetch" > '< tt > llvm.prefetch< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_pcmarker" > '< tt > llvm.pcmarker< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_readcyclecounter" > < tt > llvm.readcyclecounter< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2004-04-09 16:43:20 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_libc" > Standard C Library Intrinsics< / a >
< ol >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_memcpy" > '< tt > llvm.memcpy.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_memmove" > '< tt > llvm.memmove.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_memset" > '< tt > llvm.memset.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_sqrt" > '< tt > llvm.sqrt.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_powi" > '< tt > llvm.powi.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_sin" > '< tt > llvm.sin.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_cos" > '< tt > llvm.cos.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_pow" > '< tt > llvm.pow.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2006-01-13 23:26:38 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_manip" > Bit Manipulation Intrinsics< / a >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< ol >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_bswap" > '< tt > llvm.bswap.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a > < / li >
2006-01-16 22:34:14 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_ctpop" > '< tt > llvm.ctpop.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_ctlz" > '< tt > llvm.ctlz.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_cttz" > '< tt > llvm.cttz.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic < / a > < / li >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_overflow" > Arithmetic with Overflow Intrinsics< / a >
< ol >
2009-02-08 04:04:40 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_sadd_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.sadd.with.overflow.*< / tt > Intrinsics< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_uadd_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.uadd.with.overflow.*< / tt > Intrinsics< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_ssub_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.ssub.with.overflow.*< / tt > Intrinsics< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_usub_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.usub.with.overflow.*< / tt > Intrinsics< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_smul_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.smul.with.overflow.*< / tt > Intrinsics< / a > < / li >
2009-02-08 23:00:09 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_umul_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.umul.with.overflow.*< / tt > Intrinsics< / a > < / li >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_debugger" > Debugger intrinsics< / a > < / li >
2007-03-14 19:31:19 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_eh" > Exception Handling intrinsics< / a > < / li >
2007-09-11 14:10:23 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_trampoline" > Trampoline Intrinsic< / a >
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#int_it" > '< tt > llvm.init.trampoline< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< / ol >
< / li >
2008-11-18 22:10:53 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_atomics" > Atomic intrinsics< / a >
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#int_memory_barrier" > < tt > llvm.memory_barrier< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_cmp_swap" > < tt > llvm.atomic.cmp.swap< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_swap" > < tt > llvm.atomic.swap< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_add" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.add< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_sub" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.sub< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_and" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.and< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_nand" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.nand< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_or" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.or< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_xor" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.xor< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_max" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.max< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_min" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.min< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_umax" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.umax< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_atomic_load_umin" > < tt > llvm.atomic.load.umin< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< / ol >
< / li >
2009-10-13 07:03:23 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_memorymarkers" > Memory Use Markers< / a >
< ol >
< li > < a href = "#int_lifetime_start" > < tt > llvm.lifetime.start< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_lifetime_end" > < tt > llvm.lifetime.end< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_invariant_start" > < tt > llvm.invariant.start< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_invariant_end" > < tt > llvm.invariant.end< / tt > < / a > < / li >
< / ol >
< / li >
2007-07-20 19:59:11 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_general" > General intrinsics< / a >
2007-06-15 20:50:54 +00:00
< ol >
2007-07-20 19:59:11 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_var_annotation" >
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
'< tt > llvm.var.annotation< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_annotation" >
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
'< tt > llvm.annotation.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2008-01-15 22:31:34 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_trap" >
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
'< tt > llvm.trap< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
< li > < a href = "#int_stackprotector" >
'< tt > llvm.stackprotector< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2009-11-30 08:03:53 +00:00
< li > < a href = "#int_objectsize" >
'< tt > llvm.objectsize< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < / li >
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
< / ol >
2007-06-15 20:50:54 +00:00
< / li >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / ol >
< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / ol >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< div class = "doc_author" >
< p > Written by < a href = "mailto:sabre@nondot.org" > Chris Lattner< / a >
and < a href = "mailto:vadve@cs.uiuc.edu" > Vikram Adve< / a > < / p >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "abstract" > Abstract < / a > < / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This document is a reference manual for the LLVM assembly language. LLVM is
a Static Single Assignment (SSA) based representation that provides type
safety, low-level operations, flexibility, and the capability of representing
'all' high-level languages cleanly. It is the common code representation
used throughout all phases of the LLVM compilation strategy.< / p >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "introduction" > Introduction< / a > < / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The LLVM code representation is designed to be used in three different forms:
as an in-memory compiler IR, as an on-disk bitcode representation (suitable
for fast loading by a Just-In-Time compiler), and as a human readable
assembly language representation. This allows LLVM to provide a powerful
intermediate representation for efficient compiler transformations and
analysis, while providing a natural means to debug and visualize the
transformations. The three different forms of LLVM are all equivalent. This
document describes the human readable representation and notation.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The LLVM representation aims to be light-weight and low-level while being
expressive, typed, and extensible at the same time. It aims to be a
"universal IR" of sorts, by being at a low enough level that high-level ideas
may be cleanly mapped to it (similar to how microprocessors are "universal
IR's", allowing many source languages to be mapped to them). By providing
type information, LLVM can be used as the target of optimizations: for
example, through pointer analysis, it can be proven that a C automatic
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
variable is never accessed outside of the current function, allowing it to
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
be promoted to a simple SSA value instead of a memory location.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "wellformed" > Well-Formedness< / a > < / div >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > It is important to note that this document describes 'well formed' LLVM
assembly language. There is a difference between what the parser accepts and
what is considered 'well formed'. For example, the following instruction is
syntactically okay, but not well formed:< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
%x = < a href = "#i_add" > add< / a > i32 1, %x
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< p > because the definition of < tt > %x< / tt > does not dominate all of its uses. The
LLVM infrastructure provides a verification pass that may be used to verify
that an LLVM module is well formed. This pass is automatically run by the
parser after parsing input assembly and by the optimizer before it outputs
bitcode. The violations pointed out by the verifier pass indicate bugs in
transformation passes or input to the parser.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2007-10-03 17:34:29 +00:00
<!-- Describe the typesetting conventions here. -->
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "identifiers" > Identifiers< / a > < / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM identifiers come in two basic types: global and local. Global
identifiers (functions, global variables) begin with the < tt > '@'< / tt >
character. Local identifiers (register names, types) begin with
the < tt > '%'< / tt > character. Additionally, there are three different formats
for identifiers, for different purposes:< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< ol >
2007-08-07 14:34:28 +00:00
< li > Named values are represented as a string of characters with their prefix.
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
For example, < tt > %foo< / tt > , < tt > @DivisionByZero< / tt > ,
< tt > %a.really.long.identifier< / tt > . The actual regular expression used is
'< tt > [%@][a-zA-Z$._][a-zA-Z$._0-9]*< / tt > '. Identifiers which require
other characters in their names can be surrounded with quotes. Special
characters may be escaped using < tt > "\xx"< / tt > where < tt > xx< / tt > is the
ASCII code for the character in hexadecimal. In this way, any character
can be used in a name value, even quotes themselves.< / li >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2007-08-07 14:34:28 +00:00
< li > Unnamed values are represented as an unsigned numeric value with their
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
prefix. For example, < tt > %12< / tt > , < tt > @2< / tt > , < tt > %44< / tt > .< / li >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2004-12-09 18:02:53 +00:00
< li > Constants, which are described in a < a href = "#constants" > section about
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
constants< / a > , below.< / li >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / ol >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2007-08-07 14:34:28 +00:00
< p > LLVM requires that values start with a prefix for two reasons: Compilers
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
don't need to worry about name clashes with reserved words, and the set of
reserved words may be expanded in the future without penalty. Additionally,
unnamed identifiers allow a compiler to quickly come up with a temporary
variable without having to avoid symbol table conflicts.< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< p > Reserved words in LLVM are very similar to reserved words in other
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
languages. There are keywords for different opcodes
('< tt > < a href = "#i_add" > add< / a > < / tt > ',
'< tt > < a href = "#i_bitcast" > bitcast< / a > < / tt > ',
'< tt > < a href = "#i_ret" > ret< / a > < / tt > ', etc...), for primitive type names
('< tt > < a href = "#t_void" > void< / a > < / tt > ',
'< tt > < a href = "#t_primitive" > i32< / a > < / tt > ', etc...), and others. These
reserved words cannot conflict with variable names, because none of them
start with a prefix character (< tt > '%'< / tt > or < tt > '@'< / tt > ).< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< p > Here is an example of LLVM code to multiply the integer variable
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
'< tt > %X< / tt > ' by 8:< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The easy way:< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
%result = < a href = "#i_mul" > mul< / a > i32 %X, 8
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > After strength reduction:< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
%result = < a href = "#i_shl" > shl< / a > i32 %X, i8 3
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > And the hard way:< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< pre >
2009-10-28 13:05:07 +00:00
%0 = < a href = "#i_add" > add< / a > i32 %X, %X < i > ; yields {i32}:%0< / i >
%1 = < a href = "#i_add" > add< / a > i32 %0, %0 < i > ; yields {i32}:%1< / i >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
%result = < a href = "#i_add" > add< / a > i32 %1, %1
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This last way of multiplying < tt > %X< / tt > by 8 illustrates several important
lexical features of LLVM:< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< ol >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< li > Comments are delimited with a '< tt > ;< / tt > ' and go until the end of
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
line.< / li >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< li > Unnamed temporaries are created when the result of a computation is not
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
assigned to a named value.< / li >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< li > Unnamed temporaries are numbered sequentially< / li >
< / ol >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< p > It also shows a convention that we follow in this document. When
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
demonstrating instructions, we will follow an instruction with a comment that
defines the type and name of value produced. Comments are shown in italic
text.< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "highlevel" > High Level Structure< / a > < / div >
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "modulestructure" > Module Structure< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM programs are composed of "Module"s, each of which is a translation unit
of the input programs. Each module consists of functions, global variables,
and symbol table entries. Modules may be combined together with the LLVM
linker, which merges function (and global variable) definitions, resolves
forward declarations, and merges symbol table entries. Here is an example of
the "hello world" module:< / p >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< pre >
< i > ; Declare the string constant as a global constant.< / i >
< a href = "#identifiers" > @.LC0< / a > = < a href = "#linkage_internal" > internal< / a > < a href = "#globalvars" > constant< / a > < a href = "#t_array" > [13 x i8]< / a > c"hello world\0A\00" < i > ; [13 x i8]*< / i >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< i > ; External declaration of the puts function< / i >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< a href = "#functionstructure" > declare< / a > i32 @puts(i8 *) < i > ; i32(i8 *)* < / i >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< i > ; Definition of main function< / i >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
define i32 @main() { < i > ; i32()* < / i >
< i > ; Convert [13 x i8]* to i8 *...< / i >
%cast210 = < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > getelementptr< / a > [13 x i8]* @.LC0, i64 0, i64 0 < i > ; i8 *< / i >
< i > ; Call puts function to write out the string to stdout.< / i >
< a href = "#i_call" > call< / a > i32 @puts(i8 * %cast210) < i > ; i32< / i >
< a href = "#i_ret" > ret< / a > i32 0< br > }< br >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / pre >
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This example is made up of a < a href = "#globalvars" > global variable< / a > named
"< tt > .LC0< / tt > ", an external declaration of the "< tt > puts< / tt > " function, and
a < a href = "#functionstructure" > function definition< / a > for
"< tt > main< / tt > ".< / p >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > In general, a module is made up of a list of global values, where both
functions and global variables are global values. Global values are
represented by a pointer to a memory location (in this case, a pointer to an
array of char, and a pointer to a function), and have one of the
following < a href = "#linkage" > linkage types< / a > .< / p >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "linkage" > Linkage Types< / a >
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > All Global Variables and Functions have one of the following types of
linkage:< / p >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< dl >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_private" > private< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Global values with private linkage are only directly accessible by objects
in the current module. In particular, linking code into a module with an
private global value may cause the private to be renamed as necessary to
avoid collisions. Because the symbol is private to the module, all
references can be updated. This doesn't show up in any symbol table in the
object file.< / dd >
2009-01-15 20:18:42 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_linker_private" > linker_private< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 01:03:30 +00:00
< dd > Similar to private, but the symbol is passed through the assembler and
2009-08-24 04:32:16 +00:00
removed by the linker after evaluation. Note that (unlike private
symbols) linker_private symbols are subject to coalescing by the linker:
weak symbols get merged and redefinitions are rejected. However, unlike
normal strong symbols, they are removed by the linker from the final
linked image (executable or dynamic library).< / dd >
2009-07-20 01:03:30 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_internal" > internal< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Similar to private, but the value shows as a local symbol
(< tt > STB_LOCAL< / tt > in the case of ELF) in the object file. This
corresponds to the notion of the '< tt > static< / tt > ' keyword in C.< / dd >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_available_externally" > available_externally< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-04-13 05:44:34 +00:00
< dd > Globals with "< tt > available_externally< / tt > " linkage are never emitted
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
into the object file corresponding to the LLVM module. They exist to
allow inlining and other optimizations to take place given knowledge of
the definition of the global, which is known to be somewhere outside the
module. Globals with < tt > available_externally< / tt > linkage are allowed to
be discarded at will, and are otherwise the same as < tt > linkonce_odr< / tt > .
This linkage type is only allowed on definitions, not declarations.< / dd >
2009-04-13 05:44:34 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_linkonce" > linkonce< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2007-01-14 06:51:48 +00:00
< dd > Globals with "< tt > linkonce< / tt > " linkage are merged with other globals of
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the same name when linkage occurs. This is typically used to implement
inline functions, templates, or other code which must be generated in each
translation unit that uses it. Unreferenced < tt > linkonce< / tt > globals are
allowed to be discarded.< / dd >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_weak" > weak< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-08-05 05:21:07 +00:00
< dd > "< tt > weak< / tt > " linkage has the same merging semantics as
< tt > linkonce< / tt > linkage, except that unreferenced globals with
< tt > weak< / tt > linkage may not be discarded. This is used for globals that
are declared "weak" in C source code.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_common" > common< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-08-05 05:21:07 +00:00
< dd > "< tt > common< / tt > " linkage is most similar to "< tt > weak< / tt > " linkage, but
they are used for tentative definitions in C, such as "< tt > int X;< / tt > " at
global scope.
Symbols with "< tt > common< / tt > " linkage are merged in the same way as
< tt > weak symbols< / tt > , and they may not be deleted if unreferenced.
2009-08-05 05:41:44 +00:00
< tt > common< / tt > symbols may not have an explicit section,
must have a zero initializer, and may not be marked '< a
href="#globalvars">< tt > constant< / tt > < / a > '. Functions and aliases may not
have common linkage.< / dd >
2008-05-23 23:13:41 +00:00
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_appending" > appending< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< dd > "< tt > appending< / tt > " linkage may only be applied to global variables of
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
pointer to array type. When two global variables with appending linkage
are linked together, the two global arrays are appended together. This is
the LLVM, typesafe, equivalent of having the system linker append together
"sections" with identical names when .o files are linked.< / dd >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_externweak" > extern_weak< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > The semantics of this linkage follow the ELF object file model: the symbol
is weak until linked, if not linked, the symbol becomes null instead of
being an undefined reference.< / dd >
2007-01-12 19:20:47 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_linkonce_odr" > linkonce_odr< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_weak_odr" > weak_odr< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Some languages allow differing globals to be merged, such as two functions
with different semantics. Other languages, such as < tt > C++< / tt > , ensure
that only equivalent globals are ever merged (the "one definition rule" -
"ODR"). Such languages can use the < tt > linkonce_odr< / tt >
and < tt > weak_odr< / tt > linkage types to indicate that the global will only
be merged with equivalent globals. These linkage types are otherwise the
same as their non-< tt > odr< / tt > versions.< / dd >
Introduce new linkage types linkonce_odr, weak_odr, common_odr
and extern_weak_odr. These are the same as the non-odr versions,
except that they indicate that the global will only be overridden
by an *equivalent* global. In C, a function with weak linkage can
be overridden by a function which behaves completely differently.
This means that IP passes have to skip weak functions, since any
deductions made from the function definition might be wrong, since
the definition could be replaced by something completely different
at link time. This is not allowed in C++, thanks to the ODR
(One-Definition-Rule): if a function is replaced by another at
link-time, then the new function must be the same as the original
function. If a language knows that a function or other global can
only be overridden by an equivalent global, it can give it the
weak_odr linkage type, and the optimizers will understand that it
is alright to make deductions based on the function body. The
code generators on the other hand map weak and weak_odr linkage
to the same thing.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@66339 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2009-03-07 15:45:40 +00:00
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_external" > externally visible< / a > < / b > < / tt > :< / dt >
2004-12-09 16:36:40 +00:00
< dd > If none of the above identifiers are used, the global is externally
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
visible, meaning that it participates in linkage and can be used to
resolve external symbol references.< / dd >
2007-04-11 23:49:50 +00:00
< / dl >
2006-09-14 18:23:27 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The next two types of linkage are targeted for Microsoft Windows platform
only. They are designed to support importing (exporting) symbols from (to)
DLLs (Dynamic Link Libraries).< / p >
2006-09-14 18:23:27 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dl >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_dllimport" > dllimport< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2006-09-14 18:23:27 +00:00
< dd > "< tt > dllimport< / tt > " linkage causes the compiler to reference a function
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
or variable via a global pointer to a pointer that is set up by the DLL
exporting the symbol. On Microsoft Windows targets, the pointer name is
formed by combining < code > __imp_< / code > and the function or variable
name.< / dd >
2006-09-14 18:23:27 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "linkage_dllexport" > dllexport< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2006-09-14 18:23:27 +00:00
< dd > "< tt > dllexport< / tt > " linkage causes the compiler to provide a global
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
pointer to a pointer in a DLL, so that it can be referenced with the
< tt > dllimport< / tt > attribute. On Microsoft Windows targets, the pointer
name is formed by combining < code > __imp_< / code > and the function or
variable name.< / dd >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< / dl >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > For example, since the "< tt > .LC0< / tt > " variable is defined to be internal, if
another module defined a "< tt > .LC0< / tt > " variable and was linked with this
one, one of the two would be renamed, preventing a collision. Since
"< tt > main< / tt > " and "< tt > puts< / tt > " are external (i.e., lacking any linkage
declarations), they are accessible outside of the current module.< / p >
< p > It is illegal for a function < i > declaration< / i > to have any linkage type
other than "externally visible", < tt > dllimport< / tt >
or < tt > extern_weak< / tt > .< / p >
Introduce new linkage types linkonce_odr, weak_odr, common_odr
and extern_weak_odr. These are the same as the non-odr versions,
except that they indicate that the global will only be overridden
by an *equivalent* global. In C, a function with weak linkage can
be overridden by a function which behaves completely differently.
This means that IP passes have to skip weak functions, since any
deductions made from the function definition might be wrong, since
the definition could be replaced by something completely different
at link time. This is not allowed in C++, thanks to the ODR
(One-Definition-Rule): if a function is replaced by another at
link-time, then the new function must be the same as the original
function. If a language knows that a function or other global can
only be overridden by an equivalent global, it can give it the
weak_odr linkage type, and the optimizers will understand that it
is alright to make deductions based on the function body. The
code generators on the other hand map weak and weak_odr linkage
to the same thing.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@66339 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2009-03-07 15:45:40 +00:00
< p > Aliases can have only < tt > external< / tt > , < tt > internal< / tt > , < tt > weak< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
or < tt > weak_odr< / tt > linkages.< / p >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< / div >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "callingconv" > Calling Conventions< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > LLVM < a href = "#functionstructure" > functions< / a > , < a href = "#i_call" > calls< / a >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
and < a href = "#i_invoke" > invokes< / a > can all have an optional calling
convention specified for the call. The calling convention of any pair of
dynamic caller/callee must match, or the behavior of the program is
undefined. The following calling conventions are supported by LLVM, and more
may be added in the future:< / p >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< dl >
< dt > < b > "< tt > ccc< / tt > " - The C calling convention< / b > :< / dt >
< dd > This calling convention (the default if no other calling convention is
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
specified) matches the target C calling conventions. This calling
convention supports varargs function calls and tolerates some mismatch in
the declared prototype and implemented declaration of the function (as
does normal C).< / dd >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< dt > < b > "< tt > fastcc< / tt > " - The fast calling convention< / b > :< / dt >
< dd > This calling convention attempts to make calls as fast as possible
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
(e.g. by passing things in registers). This calling convention allows the
target to use whatever tricks it wants to produce fast code for the
target, without having to conform to an externally specified ABI
(Application Binary Interface). Implementations of this convention should
allow arbitrary < a href = "CodeGenerator.html#tailcallopt" > tail call
optimization< / a > to be supported. This calling convention does not
support varargs and requires the prototype of all callees to exactly match
the prototype of the function definition.< / dd >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< dt > < b > "< tt > coldcc< / tt > " - The cold calling convention< / b > :< / dt >
< dd > This calling convention attempts to make code in the caller as efficient
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
as possible under the assumption that the call is not commonly executed.
As such, these calls often preserve all registers so that the call does
not break any live ranges in the caller side. This calling convention
does not support varargs and requires the prototype of all callees to
exactly match the prototype of the function definition.< / dd >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
2005-05-07 01:46:40 +00:00
< dt > < b > "< tt > cc < < em > n< / em > > < / tt > " - Numbered convention< / b > :< / dt >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< dd > Any calling convention may be specified by number, allowing
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
target-specific calling conventions to be used. Target specific calling
conventions start at 64.< / dd >
2005-05-07 01:46:40 +00:00
< / dl >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< p > More calling conventions can be added/defined on an as-needed basis, to
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
support Pascal conventions or any other well-known target-independent
convention.< / p >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< / div >
2007-01-23 12:35:46 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "visibility" > Visibility Styles< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > All Global Variables and Functions have one of the following visibility
styles:< / p >
2007-01-23 12:35:46 +00:00
< dl >
< dt > < b > "< tt > default< / tt > " - Default style< / b > :< / dt >
2008-08-05 18:29:16 +00:00
< dd > On targets that use the ELF object file format, default visibility means
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
that the declaration is visible to other modules and, in shared libraries,
means that the declared entity may be overridden. On Darwin, default
visibility means that the declaration is visible to other modules. Default
visibility corresponds to "external linkage" in the language.< / dd >
2007-01-23 12:35:46 +00:00
< dt > < b > "< tt > hidden< / tt > " - Hidden style< / b > :< / dt >
< dd > Two declarations of an object with hidden visibility refer to the same
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
object if they are in the same shared object. Usually, hidden visibility
indicates that the symbol will not be placed into the dynamic symbol
table, so no other module (executable or shared library) can reference it
directly.< / dd >
2007-01-23 12:35:46 +00:00
2007-04-29 18:35:00 +00:00
< dt > < b > "< tt > protected< / tt > " - Protected style< / b > :< / dt >
< dd > On ELF, protected visibility indicates that the symbol will be placed in
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the dynamic symbol table, but that references within the defining module
will bind to the local symbol. That is, the symbol cannot be overridden by
another module.< / dd >
2007-01-23 12:35:46 +00:00
< / dl >
< / div >
2009-01-11 20:53:49 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "namedtypes" > Named Types< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > LLVM IR allows you to specify name aliases for certain types. This can make
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
it easier to read the IR and make the IR more condensed (particularly when
recursive types are involved). An example of a name specification is:< / p >
2009-01-11 20:53:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
%mytype = type { %mytype*, i32 }
< / pre >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > You may give a name to any < a href = "#typesystem" > type< / a > except
"< a href = "t_void" > void< / a > ". Type name aliases may be used anywhere a type
is expected with the syntax "%mytype".< / p >
2009-01-11 20:53:49 +00:00
< p > Note that type names are aliases for the structural type that they indicate,
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
and that you can therefore specify multiple names for the same type. This
often leads to confusing behavior when dumping out a .ll file. Since LLVM IR
uses structural typing, the name is not part of the type. When printing out
LLVM IR, the printer will pick < em > one name< / em > to render all types of a
particular shape. This means that if you have code where two different
source types end up having the same LLVM type, that the dumper will sometimes
print the "wrong" or unexpected type. This is an important design point and
isn't going to change.< / p >
2009-01-11 20:53:49 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "globalvars" > Global Variables< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2005-02-12 19:30:21 +00:00
< p > Global variables define regions of memory allocated at compilation time
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
instead of run-time. Global variables may optionally be initialized, may
have an explicit section to be placed in, and may have an optional explicit
alignment specified. A variable may be defined as "thread_local", which
means that it will not be shared by threads (each thread will have a
separated copy of the variable). A variable may be defined as a global
"constant," which indicates that the contents of the variable
will < b > never< / b > be modified (enabling better optimization, allowing the
global data to be placed in the read-only section of an executable, etc).
Note that variables that need runtime initialization cannot be marked
"constant" as there is a store to the variable.< / p >
< p > LLVM explicitly allows < em > declarations< / em > of global variables to be marked
constant, even if the final definition of the global is not. This capability
can be used to enable slightly better optimization of the program, but
requires the language definition to guarantee that optimizations based on the
'constantness' are valid for the translation units that do not include the
definition.< / p >
< p > As SSA values, global variables define pointer values that are in scope
(i.e. they dominate) all basic blocks in the program. Global variables
always define a pointer to their "content" type because they describe a
region of memory, and all memory objects in LLVM are accessed through
pointers.< / p >
< p > A global variable may be declared to reside in a target-specific numbered
address space. For targets that support them, address spaces may affect how
optimizations are performed and/or what target instructions are used to
access the variable. The default address space is zero. The address space
qualifier must precede any other attributes.< / p >
2007-12-11 09:31:00 +00:00
2005-11-12 00:45:07 +00:00
< p > LLVM allows an explicit section to be specified for globals. If the target
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
supports it, it will emit globals to the section specified.< / p >
2005-11-12 00:45:07 +00:00
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< p > An explicit alignment may be specified for a global. If not present, or if
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the alignment is set to zero, the alignment of the global is set by the
target to whatever it feels convenient. If an explicit alignment is
specified, the global is forced to have at least that much alignment. All
alignments must be a power of 2.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > For example, the following defines a global in a numbered address space with
an initializer, section, and alignment:< / p >
2007-01-14 00:27:09 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2007-01-14 00:27:09 +00:00
< pre >
2009-01-11 00:40:00 +00:00
@G = addrspace(5) constant float 1.0, section "foo", align 4
2007-01-14 00:27:09 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2007-01-14 00:27:09 +00:00
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "functionstructure" > Functions< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM function definitions consist of the "< tt > define< / tt > " keyord, an
optional < a href = "#linkage" > linkage type< / a > , an optional
< a href = "#visibility" > visibility style< / a > , an optional
< a href = "#callingconv" > calling convention< / a > , a return type, an optional
< a href = "#paramattrs" > parameter attribute< / a > for the return type, a function
name, a (possibly empty) argument list (each with optional
< a href = "#paramattrs" > parameter attributes< / a > ), optional
< a href = "#fnattrs" > function attributes< / a > , an optional section, an optional
alignment, an optional < a href = "#gc" > garbage collector name< / a > , an opening
curly brace, a list of basic blocks, and a closing curly brace.< / p >
2007-01-23 12:35:46 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM function declarations consist of the "< tt > declare< / tt > " keyword, an
optional < a href = "#linkage" > linkage type< / a > , an optional
< a href = "#visibility" > visibility style< / a > , an optional
< a href = "#callingconv" > calling convention< / a > , a return type, an optional
< a href = "#paramattrs" > parameter attribute< / a > for the return type, a function
name, a possibly empty list of arguments, an optional alignment, and an
optional < a href = "#gc" > garbage collector name< / a > .< / p >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2008-08-05 18:29:16 +00:00
< p > A function definition contains a list of basic blocks, forming the CFG
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
(Control Flow Graph) for the function. Each basic block may optionally start
with a label (giving the basic block a symbol table entry), contains a list
of instructions, and ends with a < a href = "#terminators" > terminator< / a >
instruction (such as a branch or function return).< / p >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2007-06-08 16:52:14 +00:00
< p > The first basic block in a function is special in two ways: it is immediately
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
executed on entrance to the function, and it is not allowed to have
predecessor basic blocks (i.e. there can not be any branches to the entry
block of a function). Because the block can have no predecessors, it also
cannot have any < a href = "#i_phi" > PHI nodes< / a > .< / p >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2005-11-12 00:45:07 +00:00
< p > LLVM allows an explicit section to be specified for functions. If the target
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
supports it, it will emit functions to the section specified.< / p >
2005-11-12 00:45:07 +00:00
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< p > An explicit alignment may be specified for a function. If not present, or if
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the alignment is set to zero, the alignment of the function is set by the
target to whatever it feels convenient. If an explicit alignment is
specified, the function is forced to have at least that much alignment. All
alignments must be a power of 2.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-10-07 17:48:33 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
2008-10-13 16:55:18 +00:00
define [< a href = "#linkage" > linkage< / a > ] [< a href = "#visibility" > visibility< / a > ]
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
[< a href = "#callingconv" > cconv< / a > ] [< a href = "#paramattrs" > ret attrs< / a > ]
< ResultType> @< FunctionName> ([argument list])
[< a href = "#fnattrs" > fn Attrs< / a > ] [section "name"] [align N]
[< a href = "#gc" > gc< / a > ] { ... }
< / pre >
2008-10-07 17:48:33 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< / div >
2007-04-25 14:27:10 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "aliasstructure" > Aliases< / a >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-04-25 14:27:10 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Aliases act as "second name" for the aliasee value (which can be either
function, global variable, another alias or bitcast of global value). Aliases
may have an optional < a href = "#linkage" > linkage type< / a > , and an
optional < a href = "#visibility" > visibility style< / a > .< / p >
2007-04-25 14:27:10 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2007-05-29 09:42:13 +00:00
< pre >
2008-09-12 20:48:21 +00:00
@< Name> = alias [Linkage] [Visibility] < AliaseeTy> @< Aliasee>
2007-05-29 09:42:13 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2007-04-25 14:27:10 +00:00
< / div >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "paramattrs" > Parameter Attributes< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The return type and each parameter of a function type may have a set of
< i > parameter attributes< / i > associated with them. Parameter attributes are
used to communicate additional information about the result or parameters of
a function. Parameter attributes are considered to be part of the function,
not of the function type, so functions with different parameter attributes
can have the same function type.< / p >
< p > Parameter attributes are simple keywords that follow the type specified. If
multiple parameter attributes are needed, they are space separated. For
example:< / p >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
2009-02-15 23:06:14 +00:00
declare i32 @printf(i8* noalias nocapture, ...)
2008-10-04 18:33:34 +00:00
declare i32 @atoi(i8 zeroext)
declare signext i8 @returns_signed_char()
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / pre >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that any attributes for the function result (< tt > nounwind< / tt > ,
< tt > readonly< / tt > ) come immediately after the argument list.< / p >
< p > Currently, only the following parameter attributes are defined:< / p >
< dl >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > zeroext< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This indicates to the code generator that the parameter or return value
should be zero-extended to a 32-bit value by the caller (for a parameter)
or the callee (for a return value).< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > signext< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This indicates to the code generator that the parameter or return value
should be sign-extended to a 32-bit value by the caller (for a parameter)
or the callee (for a return value).< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > inreg< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This indicates that this parameter or return value should be treated in a
special target-dependent fashion during while emitting code for a function
call or return (usually, by putting it in a register as opposed to memory,
though some targets use it to distinguish between two different kinds of
registers). Use of this attribute is target-specific.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "byval" > byval< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This indicates that the pointer parameter should really be passed by value
to the function. The attribute implies that a hidden copy of the pointee
is made between the caller and the callee, so the callee is unable to
modify the value in the callee. This attribute is only valid on LLVM
pointer arguments. It is generally used to pass structs and arrays by
value, but is also valid on pointers to scalars. The copy is considered
to belong to the caller not the callee (for example,
< tt > < a href = "#readonly" > readonly< / a > < / tt > functions should not write to
< tt > byval< / tt > parameters). This is not a valid attribute for return
values. The byval attribute also supports specifying an alignment with
the align attribute. This has a target-specific effect on the code
generator that usually indicates a desired alignment for the synthesized
stack slot.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > sret< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This indicates that the pointer parameter specifies the address of a
structure that is the return value of the function in the source program.
This pointer must be guaranteed by the caller to be valid: loads and
stores to the structure may be assumed by the callee to not to trap. This
may only be applied to the first parameter. This is not a valid attribute
for return values. < / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > noalias< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This indicates that the pointer does not alias any global or any other
parameter. The caller is responsible for ensuring that this is the
case. On a function return value, < tt > noalias< / tt > additionally indicates
that the pointer does not alias any other pointers visible to the
caller. For further details, please see the discussion of the NoAlias
response in
< a href = "http://llvm.org/docs/AliasAnalysis.html#MustMayNo" > alias
analysis< / a > .< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > nocapture< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This indicates that the callee does not make any copies of the pointer
that outlive the callee itself. This is not a valid attribute for return
values.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > nest< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This indicates that the pointer parameter can be excised using the
< a href = "#int_trampoline" > trampoline intrinsics< / a > . This is not a valid
attribute for return values.< / dd >
< / dl >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< / div >
2007-12-10 03:18:06 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "gc" > Garbage Collector Names< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-12-10 03:18:06 +00:00
< p > Each function may specify a garbage collector name, which is simply a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
string:< / p >
2007-12-10 03:18:06 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
define void @f() gc "name" { ... }
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / pre >
< / div >
2007-12-10 03:18:06 +00:00
< p > The compiler declares the supported values of < i > name< / i > . Specifying a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
collector which will cause the compiler to alter its output in order to
support the named garbage collection algorithm.< / p >
2007-12-10 03:18:06 +00:00
< / div >
2008-09-04 23:05:13 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2008-09-26 23:51:19 +00:00
< a name = "fnattrs" > Function Attributes< / a >
2008-09-04 23:05:13 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-09-26 23:51:19 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Function attributes are set to communicate additional information about a
function. Function attributes are considered to be part of the function, not
of the function type, so functions with different parameter attributes can
have the same function type.< / p >
2008-09-26 23:51:19 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Function attributes are simple keywords that follow the type specified. If
multiple attributes are needed, they are space separated. For example:< / p >
2008-09-04 23:05:13 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2008-09-07 10:26:33 +00:00
< pre >
2008-09-26 23:51:19 +00:00
define void @f() noinline { ... }
define void @f() alwaysinline { ... }
define void @f() alwaysinline optsize { ... }
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
define void @f() optsize { ... }
2008-09-07 10:26:33 +00:00
< / pre >
2008-09-04 23:05:13 +00:00
< / div >
2008-09-07 10:26:33 +00:00
< dl >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > alwaysinline< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute indicates that the inliner should attempt to inline this
function into callers whenever possible, ignoring any active inlining size
threshold for this caller.< / dd >
2009-07-17 18:07:26 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > inlinehint< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-08-26 01:08:21 +00:00
< dd > This attribute indicates that the source code contained a hint that inlining
this function is desirable (such as the "inline" keyword in C/C++). It
is just a hint; it imposes no requirements on the inliner.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > noinline< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute indicates that the inliner should never inline this
function in any situation. This attribute may not be used together with
the < tt > alwaysinline< / tt > attribute.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > optsize< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute suggests that optimization passes and code generator passes
make choices that keep the code size of this function low, and otherwise
do optimizations specifically to reduce code size.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > noreturn< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This function attribute indicates that the function never returns
normally. This produces undefined behavior at runtime if the function
ever does dynamically return.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > nounwind< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This function attribute indicates that the function never returns with an
unwind or exceptional control flow. If the function does unwind, its
runtime behavior is undefined.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > readnone< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute indicates that the function computes its result (or decides
to unwind an exception) based strictly on its arguments, without
dereferencing any pointer arguments or otherwise accessing any mutable
state (e.g. memory, control registers, etc) visible to caller functions.
It does not write through any pointer arguments
(including < tt > < a href = "#byval" > byval< / a > < / tt > arguments) and never
changes any state visible to callers. This means that it cannot unwind
exceptions by calling the < tt > C++< / tt > exception throwing methods, but
could use the < tt > unwind< / tt > instruction.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "readonly" > readonly< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute indicates that the function does not write through any
pointer arguments (including < tt > < a href = "#byval" > byval< / a > < / tt >
arguments) or otherwise modify any state (e.g. memory, control registers,
etc) visible to caller functions. It may dereference pointer arguments
and read state that may be set in the caller. A readonly function always
returns the same value (or unwinds an exception identically) when called
with the same set of arguments and global state. It cannot unwind an
exception by calling the < tt > C++< / tt > exception throwing methods, but may
use the < tt > unwind< / tt > instruction.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > < a name = "ssp" > ssp< / a > < / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute indicates that the function should emit a stack smashing
protector. It is in the form of a "canary"— a random value placed on
the stack before the local variables that's checked upon return from the
function to see if it has been overwritten. A heuristic is used to
determine if a function needs stack protectors or not.< br >
< br >
If a function that has an < tt > ssp< / tt > attribute is inlined into a
function that doesn't have an < tt > ssp< / tt > attribute, then the resulting
function will have an < tt > ssp< / tt > attribute.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > sspreq< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute indicates that the function should < em > always< / em > emit a
stack smashing protector. This overrides
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
the < tt > < a href = "#ssp" > ssp< / a > < / tt > function attribute.< br >
< br >
If a function that has an < tt > sspreq< / tt > attribute is inlined into a
function that doesn't have an < tt > sspreq< / tt > attribute or which has
an < tt > ssp< / tt > attribute, then the resulting function will have
an < tt > sspreq< / tt > attribute.< / dd >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > noredzone< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute indicates that the code generator should not use a red
zone, even if the target-specific ABI normally permits it.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > noimplicitfloat< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attributes disables implicit floating point instructions.< / dd >
2009-11-02 00:24:16 +00:00
< dt > < tt > < b > naked< / b > < / tt > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > This attribute disables prologue / epilogue emission for the function.
This can have very system-specific consequences.< / dd >
2008-09-07 10:26:33 +00:00
< / dl >
2008-09-04 23:05:13 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-23 23:23:47 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2006-04-08 04:40:53 +00:00
< a name = "moduleasm" > Module-Level Inline Assembly< / a >
2006-01-23 23:23:47 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Modules may contain "module-level inline asm" blocks, which corresponds to
the GCC "file scope inline asm" blocks. These blocks are internally
concatenated by LLVM and treated as a single unit, but may be separated in
the < tt > .ll< / tt > file if desired. The syntax is very simple:< / p >
2006-01-23 23:23:47 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
module asm "inline asm code goes here"
module asm "more can go here"
< / pre >
< / div >
2006-01-23 23:23:47 +00:00
< p > The strings can contain any character by escaping non-printable characters.
The escape sequence used is simply "\xx" where "xx" is the two digit hex code
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
for the number.< / p >
< p > The inline asm code is simply printed to the machine code .s file when
assembly code is generated.< / p >
2006-01-23 23:23:47 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "datalayout" > Data Layout< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< p > A module may specify a target specific data layout string that specifies how
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
data is to be laid out in memory. The syntax for the data layout is
simply:< / p >
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
target datalayout = "< i > layout specification< / i > "
< / pre >
< / div >
< p > The < i > layout specification< / i > consists of a list of specifications
separated by the minus sign character ('-'). Each specification starts with
a letter and may include other information after the letter to define some
aspect of the data layout. The specifications accepted are as follows:< / p >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< dl >
< dt > < tt > E< / tt > < / dt >
< dd > Specifies that the target lays out data in big-endian form. That is, the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
bits with the most significance have the lowest address location.< / dd >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< dt > < tt > e< / tt > < / dt >
2008-08-05 18:29:16 +00:00
< dd > Specifies that the target lays out data in little-endian form. That is,
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the bits with the least significance have the lowest address
location.< / dd >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< dt > < tt > p:< i > size< / i > :< i > abi< / i > :< i > pref< / i > < / tt > < / dt >
< dd > This specifies the < i > size< / i > of a pointer and its < i > abi< / i > and
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< i > preferred< / i > alignments. All sizes are in bits. Specifying
the < i > pref< / i > alignment is optional. If omitted, the
preceding < tt > :< / tt > should be omitted too.< / dd >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< dt > < tt > i< i > size< / i > :< i > abi< / i > :< i > pref< / i > < / tt > < / dt >
< dd > This specifies the alignment for an integer type of a given bit
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< i > size< / i > . The value of < i > size< / i > must be in the range [1,2^23).< / dd >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< dt > < tt > v< i > size< / i > :< i > abi< / i > :< i > pref< / i > < / tt > < / dt >
< dd > This specifies the alignment for a vector type of a given bit
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< i > size< / i > .< / dd >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< dt > < tt > f< i > size< / i > :< i > abi< / i > :< i > pref< / i > < / tt > < / dt >
< dd > This specifies the alignment for a floating point type of a given bit
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< i > size< / i > . The value of < i > size< / i > must be either 32 (float) or 64
(double).< / dd >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< dt > < tt > a< i > size< / i > :< i > abi< / i > :< i > pref< / i > < / tt > < / dt >
< dd > This specifies the alignment for an aggregate type of a given bit
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< i > size< / i > .< / dd >
2009-06-08 22:17:53 +00:00
< dt > < tt > s< i > size< / i > :< i > abi< / i > :< i > pref< / i > < / tt > < / dt >
< dd > This specifies the alignment for a stack object of a given bit
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< i > size< / i > .< / dd >
2009-11-07 09:35:34 +00:00
< dt > < tt > n< i > size1< / i > :< i > size2< / i > :< i > size3< / i > ...< / tt > < / dt >
< dd > This specifies a set of native integer widths for the target CPU
in bits. For example, it might contain "n32" for 32-bit PowerPC,
"n32:64" for PowerPC 64, or "n8:16:32:64" for X86-64. Elements of
this set are considered to support most general arithmetic
operations efficiently.< / dd >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< / dl >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< p > When constructing the data layout for a given target, LLVM starts with a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
default set of specifications which are then (possibly) overriden by the
specifications in the < tt > datalayout< / tt > keyword. The default specifications
are given in this list:< / p >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< ul >
< li > < tt > E< / tt > - big endian< / li >
< li > < tt > p:32:64:64< / tt > - 32-bit pointers with 64-bit alignment< / li >
< li > < tt > i1:8:8< / tt > - i1 is 8-bit (byte) aligned< / li >
< li > < tt > i8:8:8< / tt > - i8 is 8-bit (byte) aligned< / li >
< li > < tt > i16:16:16< / tt > - i16 is 16-bit aligned< / li >
< li > < tt > i32:32:32< / tt > - i32 is 32-bit aligned< / li >
2008-08-05 18:29:16 +00:00
< li > < tt > i64:32:64< / tt > - i64 has ABI alignment of 32-bits but preferred
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
alignment of 64-bits< / li >
< li > < tt > f32:32:32< / tt > - float is 32-bit aligned< / li >
< li > < tt > f64:64:64< / tt > - double is 64-bit aligned< / li >
< li > < tt > v64:64:64< / tt > - 64-bit vector is 64-bit aligned< / li >
< li > < tt > v128:128:128< / tt > - 128-bit vector is 128-bit aligned< / li >
< li > < tt > a0:0:1< / tt > - aggregates are 8-bit aligned< / li >
2009-06-08 22:17:53 +00:00
< li > < tt > s0:64:64< / tt > - stack objects are 64-bit aligned< / li >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< / ul >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > When LLVM is determining the alignment for a given type, it uses the
following rules:< / p >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< ol >
< li > If the type sought is an exact match for one of the specifications, that
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
specification is used.< / li >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< li > If no match is found, and the type sought is an integer type, then the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
smallest integer type that is larger than the bitwidth of the sought type
is used. If none of the specifications are larger than the bitwidth then
the the largest integer type is used. For example, given the default
specifications above, the i7 type will use the alignment of i8 (next
largest) while both i65 and i256 will use the alignment of i64 (largest
specified).< / li >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< li > If no match is found, and the type sought is a vector type, then the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
largest vector type that is smaller than the sought vector type will be
used as a fall back. This happens because < 128 x double> can be
implemented in terms of 64 < 2 x double> , for example.< / li >
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< / ol >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-02-19 23:54:10 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2009-07-27 18:07:55 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "pointeraliasing" > Pointer Aliasing Rules< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-29 00:02:05 +00:00
< p > Any memory access must be done through a pointer value associated
2009-07-27 20:37:10 +00:00
with an address range of the memory access, otherwise the behavior
2009-07-27 18:07:55 +00:00
is undefined. Pointer values are associated with address ranges
according to the following rules:< / p >
< ul >
2009-07-29 00:02:05 +00:00
< li > A pointer value formed from a
< tt > < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > getelementptr< / a > < / tt > instruction
is associated with the addresses associated with the first operand
of the < tt > getelementptr< / tt > .< / li >
< li > An address of a global variable is associated with the address
2009-07-27 18:07:55 +00:00
range of the variable's storage.< / li >
< li > The result value of an allocation instruction is associated with
the address range of the allocated storage.< / li >
< li > A null pointer in the default address-space is associated with
2009-07-29 00:02:05 +00:00
no address.< / li >
< li > A pointer value formed by an
< tt > < a href = "#i_inttoptr" > inttoptr< / a > < / tt > is associated with all
address ranges of all pointer values that contribute (directly or
indirectly) to the computation of the pointer's value.< / li >
< li > The result value of a
< tt > < a href = "#i_bitcast" > bitcast< / a > < / tt > is associated with all
2009-07-27 18:07:55 +00:00
addresses associated with the operand of the < tt > bitcast< / tt > .< / li >
< li > An integer constant other than zero or a pointer value returned
from a function not defined within LLVM may be associated with address
ranges allocated through mechanisms other than those provided by
2009-07-29 00:02:05 +00:00
LLVM. Such ranges shall not overlap with any ranges of addresses
2009-07-27 18:07:55 +00:00
allocated by mechanisms provided by LLVM.< / li >
< / ul >
< p > LLVM IR does not associate types with memory. The result type of a
2009-07-29 00:02:05 +00:00
< tt > < a href = "#i_load" > load< / a > < / tt > merely indicates the size and
alignment of the memory from which to load, as well as the
interpretation of the value. The first operand of a
< tt > < a href = "#i_store" > store< / a > < / tt > similarly only indicates the size
and alignment of the store.< / p >
2009-07-27 18:07:55 +00:00
< p > Consequently, type-based alias analysis, aka TBAA, aka
< tt > -fstrict-aliasing< / tt > , is not applicable to general unadorned
LLVM IR. < a href = "#metadata" > Metadata< / a > may be used to encode
additional information which specialized optimization passes may use
to implement type-based alias analysis.< / p >
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "typesystem" > Type System< / a > < / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The LLVM type system is one of the most important features of the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
intermediate representation. Being typed enables a number of optimizations
to be performed on the intermediate representation directly, without having
to do extra analyses on the side before the transformation. A strong type
system makes it easier to read the generated code and enables novel analyses
and transformations that are not feasible to perform on normal three address
code representations.< / p >
2004-12-09 16:11:40 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "t_classifications" > Type
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
Classifications< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The types fall into a few useful classifications:< / p >
2004-03-01 17:47:27 +00:00
< table border = "1" cellspacing = "0" cellpadding = "4" >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< tbody >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< tr > < th > Classification< / th > < th > Types< / th > < / tr >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< tr >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< td > < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > < / td >
2007-05-16 18:44:01 +00:00
< td > < tt > i1, i2, i3, ... i8, ... i16, ... i32, ... i64, ... < / tt > < / td >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / tr >
< tr >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< td > < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > < / td >
< td > < tt > float, double, x86_fp80, fp128, ppc_fp128< / tt > < / td >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > < a name = "t_firstclass" > first class< / a > < / td >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< td > < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > ,
2008-06-18 18:42:13 +00:00
< a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > ,
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< a href = "#t_struct" > structure< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_array" > array< / a > ,
2009-05-30 05:06:04 +00:00
< a href = "#t_label" > label< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_metadata" > metadata< / a > .
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< / td >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / tr >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< tr >
< td > < a href = "#t_primitive" > primitive< / a > < / td >
< td > < a href = "#t_label" > label< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_void" > void< / a > ,
2009-05-30 05:06:04 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_metadata" > metadata< / a > .< / td >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > < a href = "#t_derived" > derived< / a > < / td >
< td > < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_array" > array< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_function" > function< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_struct" > structure< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_pstruct" > packed structure< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > ,
< a href = "#t_opaque" > opaque< / a > .
2008-10-14 16:32:04 +00:00
< / td >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< / tr >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< / tbody >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / table >
2004-03-01 17:47:27 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > types are perhaps the most
important. Values of these types are the only ones which can be produced by
2009-09-27 00:45:11 +00:00
instructions.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "t_primitive" > Primitive Types< / a > < / div >
2008-01-04 04:34:14 +00:00
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< p > The primitive types are the fundamental building blocks of the LLVM
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
system.< / p >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
2008-01-04 04:34:14 +00:00
< / div >
2009-09-27 00:45:11 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_integer" > Integer Type< / a > < / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The integer type is a very simple type that simply specifies an arbitrary
bit width for the integer type desired. Any bit width from 1 bit to
2< sup > 23< / sup > -1 (about 8 million) can be specified.< / p >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
iN
< / pre >
< p > The number of bits the integer will occupy is specified by the < tt > N< / tt >
value.< / p >
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > i1< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > a single-bit integer.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > i32< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > a 32-bit integer.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > i1942652< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > a really big integer of over 1 million bits.< / td >
< / tr >
< / table >
< / div >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_floating" > Floating Point Types< / a > < / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< table >
< tbody >
< tr > < th > Type< / th > < th > Description< / th > < / tr >
< tr > < td > < tt > float< / tt > < / td > < td > 32-bit floating point value< / td > < / tr >
< tr > < td > < tt > double< / tt > < / td > < td > 64-bit floating point value< / td > < / tr >
< tr > < td > < tt > fp128< / tt > < / td > < td > 128-bit floating point value (112-bit mantissa)< / td > < / tr >
< tr > < td > < tt > x86_fp80< / tt > < / td > < td > 80-bit floating point value (X87)< / td > < / tr >
< tr > < td > < tt > ppc_fp128< / tt > < / td > < td > 128-bit floating point value (two 64-bits)< / td > < / tr >
< / tbody >
< / table >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_void" > Void Type< / a > < / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The void type does not represent any value and has no size.< / p >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
void
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_label" > Label Type< / a > < / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The label type represents code labels.< / p >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
label
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
< / div >
2009-05-30 05:06:04 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_metadata" > Metadata Type< / a > < / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
2009-05-30 05:06:04 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-09-27 23:27:42 +00:00
< p > The metadata type represents embedded metadata. No derived types may be
created from metadata except for < a href = "#t_function" > function< / a >
arguments.
2009-05-30 05:06:04 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
metadata
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
2009-05-30 05:06:04 +00:00
< / div >
2008-01-04 04:32:38 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "t_derived" > Derived Types< / a > < / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The real power in LLVM comes from the derived types in the system. This is
what allows a programmer to represent arrays, functions, pointers, and other
2009-09-27 00:45:11 +00:00
useful types. Each of these types contain one or more element types which
may be a primitive type, or another derived type. For example, it is
possible to have a two dimensional array, using an array as the element type
of another array.< / p >
2009-01-24 15:58:40 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2007-05-16 18:44:01 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_array" > Array Type< / a > < / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The array type is a very simple derived type that arranges elements
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
sequentially in memory. The array type requires a size (number of elements)
and an underlying data type.< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2002-04-14 06:13:44 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< pre >
[< # elements> x < elementtype> ]
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The number of elements is a constant integer value; < tt > elementtype< / tt > may
be any type with a size.< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2002-04-14 06:13:44 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
2007-12-19 05:04:11 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > [40 x i32]< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > Array of 40 32-bit integer values.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > [41 x i32]< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > Array of 41 32-bit integer values.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > [4 x i8]< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > Array of 4 8-bit integer values.< / td >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< / tr >
< / table >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > Here are some examples of multidimensional arrays:< / p >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
2007-12-19 05:04:11 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > [3 x [4 x i32]]< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > 3x4 array of 32-bit integer values.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > [12 x [10 x float]]< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > 12x10 array of single precision floating point values.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > [2 x [3 x [4 x i16]]]< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > 2x3x4 array of 16-bit integer values.< / td >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< / tr >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / table >
2005-06-24 17:22:57 +00:00
2009-11-09 19:01:53 +00:00
< p > There is no restriction on indexing beyond the end of the array implied by
a static type (though there are restrictions on indexing beyond the bounds
of an allocated object in some cases). This means that single-dimension
'variable sized array' addressing can be implemented in LLVM with a zero
length array type. An implementation of 'pascal style arrays' in LLVM could
use the type "< tt > { i32, [0 x float]}< / tt > ", for example.< / p >
2005-06-24 17:22:57 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_function" > Function Type< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The function type can be thought of as a function signature. It consists of
a return type and a list of formal parameter types. The return type of a
function type is a scalar type, a void type, or a struct type. If the return
type is a struct type then all struct elements must be of first class types,
and the struct must have at least one element.< / p >
2008-03-10 20:49:15 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
< pre >
2009-09-27 07:55:32 +00:00
< returntype> (< parameter list> )
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
< / pre >
2005-10-24 16:17:18 +00:00
< p > ...where '< tt > < parameter list> < / tt > ' is a comma-separated list of type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
specifiers. Optionally, the parameter list may include a type < tt > ...< / tt > ,
which indicates that the function takes a variable number of arguments.
Variable argument functions can access their arguments with
the < a href = "#int_varargs" > variable argument handling intrinsic< / a >
2009-09-27 07:55:32 +00:00
functions. '< tt > < returntype> < / tt > ' is a any type except
2009-09-27 23:27:42 +00:00
< a href = "#t_label" > label< / a > .< / p >
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
2006-12-31 07:18:34 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > i32 (i32)< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > function taking an < tt > i32< / tt > , returning an < tt > i32< / tt >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< / td >
2006-12-31 07:18:34 +00:00
< / tr > < tr class = "layout" >
2007-07-19 23:13:04 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > float (i16 signext, i32 *) *
2006-12-31 07:20:23 +00:00
< / tt > < / td >
2006-12-31 07:18:34 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < a href = "#t_pointer" > Pointer< / a > to a function that takes
an < tt > i16< / tt > that should be sign extended and a
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > to < tt > i32< / tt > , returning
2006-12-31 07:18:34 +00:00
< tt > float< / tt > .
< / td >
< / tr > < tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > i32 (i8*, ...)< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > A vararg function that takes at least one
2007-01-04 16:43:23 +00:00
< a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > to < tt > i8 < / tt > (char in C),
2006-12-31 07:18:34 +00:00
which returns an integer. This is the signature for < tt > printf< / tt > in
LLVM.
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< / td >
2008-03-24 05:35:41 +00:00
< / tr > < tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > {i32, i32} (i32)< / tt > < / td >
2009-09-27 07:55:32 +00:00
< td class = "left" > A function taking an < tt > i32< / tt > , returning a
< a href = "#t_struct" > structure< / a > containing two < tt > i32< / tt > values
2008-03-24 05:35:41 +00:00
< / td >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< / tr >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / table >
2004-03-01 17:47:27 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_struct" > Structure Type< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The structure type is used to represent a collection of data members together
in memory. The packing of the field types is defined to match the ABI of the
underlying processor. The elements of a structure may be any type that has a
size.< / p >
< p > Structures are accessed using '< tt > < a href = "#i_load" > load< / a > < / tt > and
'< tt > < a href = "#i_store" > store< / a > < / tt > ' by getting a pointer to a field with
the '< tt > < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > getelementptr< / a > < / tt > ' instruction.< / p >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
< pre >
{ < type list> }
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > { i32, i32, i32 }< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > A triple of three < tt > i32< / tt > values< / td >
< / tr > < tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > { float, i32 (i32) * }< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > A pair, where the first element is a < tt > float< / tt > and the
second element is a < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > to a
< a href = "#t_function" > function< / a > that takes an < tt > i32< / tt > , returning
an < tt > i32< / tt > .< / td >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< / tr >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / table >
2009-01-24 15:58:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
2006-12-08 17:13:00 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_pstruct" > Packed Structure Type< / a >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-12-08 17:13:00 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-12-08 17:13:00 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The packed structure type is used to represent a collection of data members
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
together in memory. There is no padding between fields. Further, the
alignment of a packed structure is 1 byte. The elements of a packed
structure may be any type that has a size.< / p >
< p > Structures are accessed using '< tt > < a href = "#i_load" > load< / a > < / tt > and
'< tt > < a href = "#i_store" > store< / a > < / tt > ' by getting a pointer to a field with
the '< tt > < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > getelementptr< / a > < / tt > ' instruction.< / p >
2006-12-08 17:13:00 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
< pre >
< { < type list> } >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-12-08 17:13:00 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > < { i32, i32, i32 } > < / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > A triple of three < tt > i32< / tt > values< / td >
< / tr > < tr class = "layout" >
2008-09-07 10:26:33 +00:00
< td class = "left" >
< tt > < { float, i32 (i32)* } > < / tt > < / td >
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
< td class = "left" > A pair, where the first element is a < tt > float< / tt > and the
second element is a < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > to a
< a href = "#t_function" > function< / a > that takes an < tt > i32< / tt > , returning
an < tt > i32< / tt > .< / td >
2006-12-08 17:13:00 +00:00
< / tr >
< / table >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-12-08 17:13:00 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_pointer" > Pointer Type< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2002-04-14 06:13:44 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > As in many languages, the pointer type represents a pointer or reference to
another object, which must live in memory. Pointer types may have an optional
address space attribute defining the target-specific numbered address space
where the pointed-to object resides. The default address space is zero.< / p >
2009-02-08 19:53:29 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that LLVM does not permit pointers to void (< tt > void*< / tt > ) nor does it
permit pointers to labels (< tt > label*< / tt > ). Use < tt > i8*< / tt > instead.< / p >
2009-02-08 19:53:29 +00:00
2002-04-14 06:13:44 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
< pre >
< type> *
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2002-04-14 06:13:44 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
2009-01-04 23:44:43 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > [4 x i32]*< / tt > < / td >
2007-12-19 05:04:11 +00:00
< td class = "left" > A < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > to < a
href="#t_array">array< / a > of four < tt > i32< / tt > values.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > i32 (i32 *) *< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > A < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > to a < a
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
href="#t_function">function< / a > that takes an < tt > i32*< / tt > , returning an
2007-12-19 05:04:11 +00:00
< tt > i32< / tt > .< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > i32 addrspace(5)*< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > A < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > to an < tt > i32< / tt > value
that resides in address space #5.< / td >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< / tr >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / table >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
2004-08-12 19:12:28 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2007-02-15 03:07:05 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_vector" > Vector Type< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
2004-08-12 19:12:28 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > A vector type is a simple derived type that represents a vector of elements.
Vector types are used when multiple primitive data are operated in parallel
using a single instruction (SIMD). A vector type requires a size (number of
2009-11-27 13:38:03 +00:00
elements) and an underlying primitive data type. Vector types are considered
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > .< / p >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
2004-08-12 19:12:28 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
< pre >
< < # elements> x < elementtype> >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The number of elements is a constant integer value; elementtype may be any
integer or floating point type.< / p >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
2004-08-12 19:12:28 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
2007-12-19 05:04:11 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > < 4 x i32> < / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > Vector of 4 32-bit integer values.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > < 8 x float> < / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > Vector of 8 32-bit floating-point values.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > < 2 x i64> < / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > Vector of 2 64-bit integer values.< / td >
2004-11-01 08:19:36 +00:00
< / tr >
< / table >
2009-01-24 15:58:40 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "t_opaque" > Opaque Type< / a > < / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > Opaque types are used to represent unknown types in the system. This
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
corresponds (for example) to the C notion of a forward declared structure
type. In LLVM, opaque types can eventually be resolved to any type (not just
a structure type).< / p >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
opaque
< / pre >
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
2007-12-19 05:04:11 +00:00
< td class = "left" > < tt > opaque< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > An opaque type.< / td >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
< / tr >
< / table >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
< / div >
2009-02-02 07:32:36 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "t_uprefs" > Type Up-references< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-02-02 07:32:36 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > An "up reference" allows you to refer to a lexically enclosing type without
requiring it to have a name. For instance, a structure declaration may
contain a pointer to any of the types it is lexically a member of. Example
of up references (with their equivalent as named type declarations)
include:< / p >
2009-02-02 07:32:36 +00:00
< pre >
2009-02-09 10:00:56 +00:00
{ \2 * } %x = type { %x* }
2009-02-02 07:32:36 +00:00
{ \2 }* %y = type { %y }*
\1* %z = type %z*
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > An up reference is needed by the asmprinter for printing out cyclic types
when there is no declared name for a type in the cycle. Because the
asmprinter does not want to print out an infinite type string, it needs a
syntax to handle recursive types that have no names (all names are optional
in llvm IR).< / p >
2009-02-02 07:32:36 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
\< level>
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The level is the count of the lexical type that is being referred to.< / p >
2009-02-02 07:32:36 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< table class = "layout" >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > \1*< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > Self-referential pointer.< / td >
< / tr >
< tr class = "layout" >
< td class = "left" > < tt > { { \3*, i8 }, i32 }< / tt > < / td >
< td class = "left" > Recursive structure where the upref refers to the out-most
structure.< / td >
< / tr >
< / table >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / div >
2005-04-25 17:34:15 +00:00
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "constants" > Constants< / a > < / div >
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > LLVM has several different basic types of constants. This section describes
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
them all and their syntax.< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2004-12-09 18:02:53 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "simpleconstants" > Simple Constants< / a > < / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
< dl >
< dt > < b > Boolean constants< / b > < / dt >
< dd > The two strings '< tt > true< / tt > ' and '< tt > false< / tt > ' are both valid
2009-09-27 00:45:11 +00:00
constants of the < tt > < a href = "#t_integer" > i1< / a > < / tt > type.< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dt > < b > Integer constants< / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Standard integers (such as '4') are constants of
the < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > type. Negative numbers may be used
with integer types.< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dt > < b > Floating point constants< / b > < / dt >
< dd > Floating point constants use standard decimal notation (e.g. 123.421),
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
exponential notation (e.g. 1.23421e+2), or a more precise hexadecimal
notation (see below). The assembler requires the exact decimal value of a
floating-point constant. For example, the assembler accepts 1.25 but
rejects 1.3 because 1.3 is a repeating decimal in binary. Floating point
constants must have a < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > type. < / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dt > < b > Null pointer constants< / b > < / dt >
2004-12-10 15:51:16 +00:00
< dd > The identifier '< tt > null< / tt > ' is recognized as a null pointer constant
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
and must be of < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer type< / a > .< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / dl >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The one non-intuitive notation for constants is the hexadecimal form of
floating point constants. For example, the form '< tt > double
0x432ff973cafa8000< / tt > ' is equivalent to (but harder to read than)
'< tt > double 4.5e+15< / tt > '. The only time hexadecimal floating point
constants are required (and the only time that they are generated by the
disassembler) is when a floating point constant must be emitted but it cannot
be represented as a decimal floating point number in a reasonable number of
digits. For example, NaN's, infinities, and other special values are
represented in their IEEE hexadecimal format so that assembly and disassembly
do not cause any bits to change in the constants.< / p >
2009-02-11 22:14:51 +00:00
< p > When using the hexadecimal form, constants of types float and double are
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
represented using the 16-digit form shown above (which matches the IEEE754
representation for double); float values must, however, be exactly
representable as IEE754 single precision. Hexadecimal format is always used
for long double, and there are three forms of long double. The 80-bit format
used by x86 is represented as < tt > 0xK< / tt > followed by 20 hexadecimal digits.
The 128-bit format used by PowerPC (two adjacent doubles) is represented
by < tt > 0xM< / tt > followed by 32 hexadecimal digits. The IEEE 128-bit format
is represented by < tt > 0xL< / tt > followed by 32 hexadecimal digits; no
currently supported target uses this format. Long doubles will only work if
they match the long double format on your target. All hexadecimal formats
are big-endian (sign bit at the left).< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2009-02-28 18:32:25 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2009-07-20 02:32:41 +00:00
< a name = "aggregateconstants" > < / a > <!-- old anchor -->
< a name = "complexconstants" > Complex Constants< / a >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-02-28 18:32:25 +00:00
< p > Complex constants are a (potentially recursive) combination of simple
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
constants and smaller complex constants.< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dl >
< dt > < b > Structure constants< / b > < / dt >
< dd > Structure constants are represented with notation similar to structure
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
type definitions (a comma separated list of elements, surrounded by braces
(< tt > {}< / tt > )). For example: "< tt > { i32 4, float 17.0, i32* @G }< / tt > ",
where "< tt > @G< / tt > " is declared as "< tt > @G = external global i32< / tt > ".
Structure constants must have < a href = "#t_struct" > structure type< / a > , and
the number and types of elements must match those specified by the
type.< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dt > < b > Array constants< / b > < / dt >
< dd > Array constants are represented with notation similar to array type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
definitions (a comma separated list of elements, surrounded by square
brackets (< tt > []< / tt > )). For example: "< tt > [ i32 42, i32 11, i32 74
]< / tt > ". Array constants must have < a href = "#t_array" > array type< / a > , and
the number and types of elements must match those specified by the
type.< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2007-02-15 03:07:05 +00:00
< dt > < b > Vector constants< / b > < / dt >
< dd > Vector constants are represented with notation similar to vector type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
definitions (a comma separated list of elements, surrounded by
less-than/greater-than's (< tt > < > < / tt > )). For example: "< tt > < i32
42, i32 11, i32 74, i32 100 > < / tt > ". Vector constants must
have < a href = "#t_vector" > vector type< / a > , and the number and types of
elements must match those specified by the type.< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dt > < b > Zero initialization< / b > < / dt >
< dd > The string '< tt > zeroinitializer< / tt > ' can be used to zero initialize a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
value to zero of < em > any< / em > type, including scalar and aggregate types.
This is often used to avoid having to print large zero initializers
(e.g. for large arrays) and is always exactly equivalent to using explicit
zero initializers.< / dd >
2009-04-04 07:22:01 +00:00
< dt > < b > Metadata node< / b > < / dt >
2009-05-30 16:08:30 +00:00
< dd > A metadata node is a structure-like constant with
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_metadata" > metadata type< / a > . For example: "< tt > metadata !{
i32 0, metadata !"test" }< / tt > ". Unlike other constants that are meant to
be interpreted as part of the instruction stream, metadata is a place to
attach additional information such as debug info.< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / dl >
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "globalconstants" > Global Variable and Function Addresses< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The addresses of < a href = "#globalvars" > global variables< / a >
and < a href = "#functionstructure" > functions< / a > are always implicitly valid
(link-time) constants. These constants are explicitly referenced when
the < a href = "#identifiers" > identifier for the global< / a > is used and always
have < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > type. For example, the following is a
legal LLVM file:< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< pre >
2007-06-06 18:28:13 +00:00
@X = global i32 17
@Y = global i32 42
@Z = global [2 x i32*] [ i32* @X, i32* @Y ]
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2004-12-09 18:13:12 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "undefvalues" > Undefined Values< / a > < / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-09-07 22:52:39 +00:00
< p > The string '< tt > undef< / tt > ' can be used anywhere a constant is expected, and
2009-10-12 14:46:08 +00:00
indicates that the user of the value may receive an unspecified bit-pattern.
2009-09-07 22:52:39 +00:00
Undefined values may be of any type (other than label or void) and be used
anywhere a constant is permitted.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-09-11 01:49:31 +00:00
< p > Undefined values are useful because they indicate to the compiler that the
2009-09-07 22:52:39 +00:00
program is well defined no matter what value is used. This gives the
compiler more freedom to optimize. Here are some examples of (potentially
surprising) transformations that are valid (in pseudo IR):< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-09-07 22:52:39 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
%A = add %X, undef
%B = sub %X, undef
%C = xor %X, undef
Safe:
%A = undef
%B = undef
%C = undef
< / pre >
< / div >
< p > This is safe because all of the output bits are affected by the undef bits.
Any output bit can have a zero or one depending on the input bits.< / p >
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
%A = or %X, undef
%B = and %X, undef
Safe:
%A = -1
%B = 0
Unsafe:
%A = undef
%B = undef
< / pre >
< / div >
< p > These logical operations have bits that are not always affected by the input.
For example, if "%X" has a zero bit, then the output of the 'and' operation will
always be a zero, no matter what the corresponding bit from the undef is. As
2009-09-11 01:49:31 +00:00
such, it is unsafe to optimize or assume that the result of the and is undef.
However, it is safe to assume that all bits of the undef could be 0, and
optimize the and to 0. Likewise, it is safe to assume that all the bits of
the undef operand to the or could be set, allowing the or to be folded to
-1.< / p >
2009-09-07 22:52:39 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
%A = select undef, %X, %Y
%B = select undef, 42, %Y
%C = select %X, %Y, undef
Safe:
%A = %X (or %Y)
%B = 42 (or %Y)
%C = %Y
Unsafe:
%A = undef
%B = undef
%C = undef
< / pre >
< / div >
< p > This set of examples show that undefined select (and conditional branch)
conditions can go "either way" but they have to come from one of the two
operands. In the %A example, if %X and %Y were both known to have a clear low
bit, then %A would have to have a cleared low bit. However, in the %C example,
the optimizer is allowed to assume that the undef operand could be the same as
%Y, allowing the whole select to be eliminated.< / p >
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
%A = xor undef, undef
%B = undef
%C = xor %B, %B
%D = undef
%E = icmp lt %D, 4
%F = icmp gte %D, 4
Safe:
%A = undef
%B = undef
%C = undef
%D = undef
%E = undef
%F = undef
< / pre >
< / div >
< p > This example points out that two undef operands are not necessarily the same.
This can be surprising to people (and also matches C semantics) where they
assume that "X^X" is always zero, even if X is undef. This isn't true for a
number of reasons, but the short answer is that an undef "variable" can
arbitrarily change its value over its "live range". This is true because the
"variable" doesn't actually < em > have a live range< / em > . Instead, the value is
logically read from arbitrary registers that happen to be around when needed,
2009-10-12 14:46:08 +00:00
so the value is not necessarily consistent over time. In fact, %A and %C need
2009-09-08 15:13:16 +00:00
to have the same semantics or the core LLVM "replace all uses with" concept
2009-09-07 22:52:39 +00:00
would not hold.< / p >
2009-09-07 23:33:52 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
%A = fdiv undef, %X
%B = fdiv %X, undef
Safe:
%A = undef
b: unreachable
< / pre >
< / div >
< p > These examples show the crucial difference between an < em > undefined
value< / em > and < em > undefined behavior< / em > . An undefined value (like undef) is
allowed to have an arbitrary bit-pattern. This means that the %A operation
can be constant folded to undef because the undef could be an SNaN, and fdiv is
not (currently) defined on SNaN's. However, in the second example, we can make
a more aggressive assumption: because the undef is allowed to be an arbitrary
value, we are allowed to assume that it could be zero. Since a divide by zero
2009-09-08 19:45:34 +00:00
has < em > undefined behavior< / em > , we are allowed to assume that the operation
2009-09-07 23:33:52 +00:00
does not execute at all. This allows us to delete the divide and all code after
it: since the undefined operation "can't happen", the optimizer can assume that
it occurs in dead code.
< / p >
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
a: store undef -> %X
b: store %X -> undef
Safe:
a: < deleted>
b: unreachable
< / pre >
< / div >
< p > These examples reiterate the fdiv example: a store "of" an undefined value
can be assumed to not have any effect: we can assume that the value is
overwritten with bits that happen to match what was already there. However, a
store "to" an undefined location could clobber arbitrary memory, therefore, it
has undefined behavior.< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / div >
2009-10-27 21:01:34 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2009-10-27 21:19:13 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "blockaddress" > Addresses of Basic
Blocks< / a > < / div >
2009-10-27 21:01:34 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-11-01 01:27:45 +00:00
< p > < b > < tt > blockaddress(@function, %block)< / tt > < / b > < / p >
2009-10-27 21:01:34 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > blockaddress< / tt > ' constant computes the address of the specified
2009-10-27 21:49:40 +00:00
basic block in the specified function, and always has an i8* type. Taking
2009-11-01 01:27:45 +00:00
the address of the entry block is illegal.< / p >
2009-10-27 21:01:34 +00:00
< p > This value only has defined behavior when used as an operand to the
2009-10-28 00:19:10 +00:00
'< a href = "#i_indirectbr" > < tt > indirectbr< / tt > < / a > ' instruction or for comparisons
2009-10-27 21:01:34 +00:00
against null. Pointer equality tests between labels addresses is undefined
behavior - though, again, comparison against null is ok, and no label is
2009-10-27 21:19:13 +00:00
equal to the null pointer. This may also be passed around as an opaque
pointer sized value as long as the bits are not inspected. This allows
2009-10-27 21:44:20 +00:00
< tt > ptrtoint< / tt > and arithmetic to be performed on these values so long as
2009-10-28 00:19:10 +00:00
the original value is reconstituted before the < tt > indirectbr< / tt > .< / p >
2009-10-27 21:19:13 +00:00
< p > Finally, some targets may provide defined semantics when
2009-10-27 21:01:34 +00:00
using the value as the operand to an inline assembly, but that is target
specific.
< / p >
< / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "constantexprs" > Constant Expressions< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > Constant expressions are used to allow expressions involving other constants
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
to be used as constants. Constant expressions may be of
any < a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > type and may involve any LLVM
operation that does not have side effects (e.g. load and call are not
supported). The following is the syntax for constant expressions:< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dl >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > trunc ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Truncate a constant to another type. The bit size of CST must be larger
than the bit size of TYPE. Both types must be integers.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > zext ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Zero extend a constant to another type. The bit size of CST must be
smaller or equal to the bit size of TYPE. Both types must be
integers.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > sext ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Sign extend a constant to another type. The bit size of CST must be
smaller or equal to the bit size of TYPE. Both types must be
integers.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > fptrunc ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Truncate a floating point constant to another floating point type. The
size of CST must be larger than the size of TYPE. Both types must be
floating point.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > fpext ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Floating point extend a constant to another type. The size of CST must be
smaller or equal to the size of TYPE. Both types must be floating
point.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
2007-07-31 14:40:14 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > fptoui ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dd > Convert a floating point constant to the corresponding unsigned integer
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
constant. TYPE must be a scalar or vector integer type. CST must be of
scalar or vector floating point type. Both CST and TYPE must be scalars,
or vectors of the same number of elements. If the value won't fit in the
integer type, the results are undefined.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > fptosi ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dd > Convert a floating point constant to the corresponding signed integer
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
constant. TYPE must be a scalar or vector integer type. CST must be of
scalar or vector floating point type. Both CST and TYPE must be scalars,
or vectors of the same number of elements. If the value won't fit in the
integer type, the results are undefined.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > uitofp ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dd > Convert an unsigned integer constant to the corresponding floating point
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
constant. TYPE must be a scalar or vector floating point type. CST must be
of scalar or vector integer type. Both CST and TYPE must be scalars, or
vectors of the same number of elements. If the value won't fit in the
floating point type, the results are undefined.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > sitofp ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< dd > Convert a signed integer constant to the corresponding floating point
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
constant. TYPE must be a scalar or vector floating point type. CST must be
of scalar or vector integer type. Both CST and TYPE must be scalars, or
vectors of the same number of elements. If the value won't fit in the
floating point type, the results are undefined.< / dd >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
2006-11-11 23:08:07 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > ptrtoint ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
< dd > Convert a pointer typed constant to the corresponding integer constant
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > TYPE< / tt > must be an integer type. < tt > CST< / tt > must be of pointer
type. The < tt > CST< / tt > value is zero extended, truncated, or unchanged to
make it fit in < tt > TYPE< / tt > .< / dd >
2006-11-11 23:08:07 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > inttoptr ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Convert a integer constant to a pointer constant. TYPE must be a pointer
type. CST must be of integer type. The CST value is zero extended,
truncated, or unchanged to make it fit in a pointer size. This one is
< i > really< / i > dangerous!< / dd >
2006-11-11 23:08:07 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > bitcast ( CST to TYPE )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-02-28 18:27:03 +00:00
< dd > Convert a constant, CST, to another TYPE. The constraints of the operands
are the same as those for the < a href = "#i_bitcast" > bitcast
instruction< / a > .< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > getelementptr ( CSTPTR, IDX0, IDX1, ... )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-27 21:53:46 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > getelementptr inbounds ( CSTPTR, IDX0, IDX1, ... )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dd > Perform the < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > getelementptr operation< / a > on
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
constants. As with the < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > getelementptr< / a >
instruction, the index list may have zero or more indexes, which are
required to make sense for the type of "CSTPTR".< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2006-01-10 19:31:34 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > select ( COND, VAL1, VAL2 )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Perform the < a href = "#i_select" > select operation< / a > on constants.< / dd >
2006-12-04 19:23:19 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > icmp COND ( VAL1, VAL2 )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
< dd > Performs the < a href = "#i_icmp" > icmp operation< / a > on constants.< / dd >
< dt > < b > < tt > fcmp COND ( VAL1, VAL2 )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
< dd > Performs the < a href = "#i_fcmp" > fcmp operation< / a > on constants.< / dd >
2006-01-10 19:31:34 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > extractelement ( VAL, IDX )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Perform the < a href = "#i_extractelement" > extractelement operation< / a > on
constants.< / dd >
2006-01-10 19:31:34 +00:00
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > insertelement ( VAL, ELT, IDX )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Perform the < a href = "#i_insertelement" > insertelement operation< / a > on
constants.< / dd >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > shufflevector ( VEC1, VEC2, IDXMASK )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Perform the < a href = "#i_shufflevector" > shufflevector operation< / a > on
constants.< / dd >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< dt > < b > < tt > OPCODE ( LHS, RHS )< / tt > < / b > < / dt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< dd > Perform the specified operation of the LHS and RHS constants. OPCODE may
be any of the < a href = "#binaryops" > binary< / a >
or < a href = "#bitwiseops" > bitwise binary< / a > operations. The constraints
on operands are the same as those for the corresponding instruction
(e.g. no bitwise operations on floating point values are allowed).< / dd >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / dl >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
< / div >
2004-03-08 16:49:10 +00:00
2009-04-04 07:22:01 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "metadata" > Embedded Metadata< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Embedded metadata provides a way to attach arbitrary data to the instruction
stream without affecting the behaviour of the program. There are two
metadata primitives, strings and nodes. All metadata has the
< tt > metadata< / tt > type and is identified in syntax by a preceding exclamation
point ('< tt > !< / tt > ').< / p >
2009-04-04 07:22:01 +00:00
< p > A metadata string is a string surrounded by double quotes. It can contain
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
any character by escaping non-printable characters with "\xx" where "xx" is
the two digit hex code. For example: "< tt > !"test\00"< / tt > ".< / p >
2009-04-04 07:22:01 +00:00
< p > Metadata nodes are represented with notation similar to structure constants
2009-10-12 14:46:08 +00:00
(a comma separated list of elements, surrounded by braces and preceded by an
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
exclamation point). For example: "< tt > !{ metadata !"test\00", i32
10}< / tt > ".< / p >
2009-04-04 07:22:01 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > A metadata node will attempt to track changes to the values it holds. In the
event that a value is deleted, it will be replaced with a typeless
"< tt > null< / tt > ", such as "< tt > metadata !{null, i32 10}< / tt > ".< / p >
2009-05-10 20:57:05 +00:00
2009-04-04 07:22:01 +00:00
< p > Optimizations may rely on metadata to provide additional information about
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the program that isn't available in the instructions, or that isn't easily
computable. Similarly, the code generator may expect a certain metadata
format to be used to express debugging information.< / p >
2009-04-04 07:22:01 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "othervalues" > Other Values< / a > < / div >
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "inlineasm" > Inline Assembler Expressions< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM supports inline assembler expressions (as opposed
to < a href = "#moduleasm" > Module-Level Inline Assembly< / a > ) through the use of
a special value. This value represents the inline assembler as a string
(containing the instructions to emit), a list of operand constraints (stored
2009-10-13 21:56:55 +00:00
as a string), a flag that indicates whether or not the inline asm
2009-10-21 23:28:00 +00:00
expression has side effects, and a flag indicating whether the function
containing the asm needs to align its stack conservatively. An example
inline assembler expression is:< / p >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
i32 (i32) asm "bswap $0", "=r,r"
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Inline assembler expressions may < b > only< / b > be used as the callee operand of
a < a href = "#i_call" > < tt > call< / tt > instruction< / a > . Thus, typically we
have:< / p >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
%X = call i32 asm "< a href = "#int_bswap" > bswap< / a > $0", "=r,r"(i32 %Y)
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Inline asms with side effects not visible in the constraint list must be
marked as having side effects. This is done through the use of the
'< tt > sideeffect< / tt > ' keyword, like so:< / p >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
call void asm sideeffect "eieio", ""()
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
2009-10-21 23:28:00 +00:00
< p > In some cases inline asms will contain code that will not work unless the
stack is aligned in some way, such as calls or SSE instructions on x86,
yet will not contain code that does that alignment within the asm.
The compiler should make conservative assumptions about what the asm might
contain and should generate its usual stack alignment code in the prologue
if the '< tt > alignstack< / tt > ' keyword is present:< / p >
2009-10-13 21:56:55 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
2009-10-21 23:28:00 +00:00
call void asm alignstack "eieio", ""()
2009-10-13 21:56:55 +00:00
< / pre >
< / div >
< p > If both keywords appear the '< tt > sideeffect< / tt > ' keyword must come
first.< / p >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< p > TODO: The format of the asm and constraints string still need to be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
documented here. Constraints on what can be done (e.g. duplication, moving,
etc need to be documented). This is probably best done by reference to
another document that covers inline asm from a holistic perspective.< / p >
2006-01-25 23:47:57 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 05:55:19 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
< div class = "doc_section" >
< a name = "intrinsic_globals" > Intrinsic Global Variables< / a >
< / div >
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
< p > LLVM has a number of "magic" global variables that contain data that affect
code generation or other IR semantics. These are documented here. All globals
2009-07-20 06:14:25 +00:00
of this sort should have a section specified as "< tt > llvm.metadata< / tt > ". This
section and all globals that start with "< tt > llvm.< / tt > " are reserved for use
by LLVM.< / p >
2009-07-20 05:55:19 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "intg_used" > The '< tt > llvm.used< / tt > ' Global Variable< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > The < tt > @llvm.used< / tt > global is an array with i8* element type which has < a
href="#linkage_appending">appending linkage< / a > . This array contains a list of
pointers to global variables and functions which may optionally have a pointer
cast formed of bitcast or getelementptr. For example, a legal use of it is:< / p >
< pre >
@X = global i8 4
@Y = global i32 123
@llvm.used = appending global [2 x i8*] [
i8* @X,
i8* bitcast (i32* @Y to i8*)
], section "llvm.metadata"
< / pre >
< p > If a global variable appears in the < tt > @llvm.used< / tt > list, then the
compiler, assembler, and linker are required to treat the symbol as if there is
a reference to the global that it cannot see. For example, if a variable has
internal linkage and no references other than that from the < tt > @llvm.used< / tt >
list, it cannot be deleted. This is commonly used to represent references from
inline asms and other things the compiler cannot "see", and corresponds to
"attribute((used))" in GNU C.< / p >
< p > On some targets, the code generator must emit a directive to the assembler or
object file to prevent the assembler and linker from molesting the symbol.< / p >
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2009-07-20 06:14:25 +00:00
< a name = "intg_compiler_used" > The '< tt > llvm.compiler.used< / tt > ' Global Variable< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > The < tt > @llvm.compiler.used< / tt > directive is the same as the
< tt > @llvm.used< / tt > directive, except that it only prevents the compiler from
touching the symbol. On targets that support it, this allows an intelligent
linker to optimize references to the symbol without being impeded as it would be
by < tt > @llvm.used< / tt > .< / p >
< p > This is a rare construct that should only be used in rare circumstances, and
should not be exposed to source languages.< / p >
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2009-07-20 05:55:19 +00:00
< a name = "intg_global_ctors" > The '< tt > llvm.global_ctors< / tt > ' Global Variable< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > TODO: Describe this.< / p >
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "intg_global_dtors" > The '< tt > llvm.global_dtors< / tt > ' Global Variable< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > TODO: Describe this.< / p >
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "instref" > Instruction Reference< / a > < / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The LLVM instruction set consists of several different classifications of
instructions: < a href = "#terminators" > terminator
instructions< / a > , < a href = "#binaryops" > binary instructions< / a > ,
< a href = "#bitwiseops" > bitwise binary instructions< / a > ,
< a href = "#memoryops" > memory instructions< / a > , and
< a href = "#otherops" > other instructions< / a > .< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "terminators" > Terminator
Instructions< / a > < / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > As mentioned < a href = "#functionstructure" > previously< / a > , every basic block
in a program ends with a "Terminator" instruction, which indicates which
block should be executed after the current block is finished. These
terminator instructions typically yield a '< tt > void< / tt > ' value: they produce
control flow, not values (the one exception being the
'< a href = "#i_invoke" > < tt > invoke< / tt > < / a > ' instruction).< / p >
< p > There are six different terminator instructions: the
'< a href = "#i_ret" > < tt > ret< / tt > < / a > ' instruction, the
'< a href = "#i_br" > < tt > br< / tt > < / a > ' instruction, the
'< a href = "#i_switch" > < tt > switch< / tt > < / a > ' instruction, the
2009-11-02 00:25:26 +00:00
'< a href = "#i_indirectbr" > '< tt > indirectbr< / tt > < / a > ' Instruction, the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
'< a href = "#i_invoke" > < tt > invoke< / tt > < / a > ' instruction, the
'< a href = "#i_unwind" > < tt > unwind< / tt > < / a > ' instruction, and the
'< a href = "#i_unreachable" > < tt > unreachable< / tt > < / a > ' instruction.< / p >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-12-09 17:30:23 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_ret" > '< tt > ret< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-10-04 19:00:07 +00:00
< pre >
ret < type> < value> < i > ; Return a value from a non-void function< / i >
2002-04-14 06:13:44 +00:00
ret void < i > ; Return from void function< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > ret< / tt > ' instruction is used to return control flow (and optionally
a value) from a function back to the caller.< / p >
< p > There are two forms of the '< tt > ret< / tt > ' instruction: one that returns a
value and then causes control flow, and one that just causes control flow to
occur.< / p >
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > ret< / tt > ' instruction optionally accepts a single argument, the
return value. The type of the return value must be a
'< a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > ' type.< / p >
2008-10-04 19:00:07 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > A function is not < a href = "#wellformed" > well formed< / a > if it it has a
non-void return type and contains a '< tt > ret< / tt > ' instruction with no return
value or a return value with a type that does not match its type, or if it
has a void return type and contains a '< tt > ret< / tt > ' instruction with a
return value.< / p >
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > When the '< tt > ret< / tt > ' instruction is executed, control flow returns back to
the calling function's context. If the caller is a
"< a href = "#i_call" > < tt > call< / tt > < / a > " instruction, execution continues at the
instruction after the call. If the caller was an
"< a href = "#i_invoke" > < tt > invoke< / tt > < / a > " instruction, execution continues at
the beginning of the "normal" destination block. If the instruction returns
a value, that value shall set the call or invoke instruction's return
value.< / p >
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2008-04-23 04:59:35 +00:00
< pre >
ret i32 5 < i > ; Return an integer value of 5< / i >
2002-04-14 06:13:44 +00:00
ret void < i > ; Return from a void function< / i >
2009-02-28 22:12:54 +00:00
ret { i32, i8 } { i32 4, i8 2 } < i > ; Return a struct of values 4 and 2< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-01-12 23:12:39 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_br" > '< tt > br< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
br i1 < cond> , label < iftrue> , label < iffalse> < br > br label < dest> < i > ; Unconditional branch< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > br< / tt > ' instruction is used to cause control flow to transfer to a
different basic block in the current function. There are two forms of this
instruction, corresponding to a conditional branch and an unconditional
branch.< / p >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The conditional branch form of the '< tt > br< / tt > ' instruction takes a single
'< tt > i1< / tt > ' value and two '< tt > label< / tt > ' values. The unconditional form
of the '< tt > br< / tt > ' instruction takes a single '< tt > label< / tt > ' value as a
target.< / p >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2007-01-12 03:35:51 +00:00
< p > Upon execution of a conditional '< tt > br< / tt > ' instruction, the '< tt > i1< / tt > '
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
argument is evaluated. If the value is < tt > true< / tt > , control flows to the
'< tt > iftrue< / tt > ' < tt > label< / tt > argument. If "cond" is < tt > false< / tt > ,
control flows to the '< tt > iffalse< / tt > ' < tt > label< / tt > argument.< / p >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:39:26 +00:00
< pre >
Test:
%cond = < a href = "#i_icmp" > icmp< / a > eq i32 %a, %b
br i1 %cond, label %IfEqual, label %IfUnequal
IfEqual:
< a href = "#i_ret" > ret< / a > i32 1
IfUnequal:
< a href = "#i_ret" > ret< / a > i32 0
< / pre >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_switch" > '< tt > switch< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
< pre >
switch < intty> < value> , label < defaultdest> [ < intty> < val> , label < dest> ... ]
< / pre >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > switch< / tt > ' instruction is used to transfer control flow to one of
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
several different places. It is a generalization of the '< tt > br< / tt > '
instruction, allowing a branch to occur to one of many possible
destinations.< / p >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > switch< / tt > ' instruction uses three parameters: an integer
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
comparison value '< tt > value< / tt > ', a default '< tt > label< / tt > ' destination,
and an array of pairs of comparison value constants and '< tt > label< / tt > 's.
The table is not allowed to contain duplicate constant entries.< / p >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< p > The < tt > switch< / tt > instruction specifies a table of values and
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
destinations. When the '< tt > switch< / tt > ' instruction is executed, this table
is searched for the given value. If the value is found, control flow is
2009-10-12 14:46:08 +00:00
transferred to the corresponding destination; otherwise, control flow is
transferred to the default destination.< / p >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
2003-05-08 05:08:48 +00:00
< h5 > Implementation:< / h5 >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
< p > Depending on properties of the target machine and the particular
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > switch< / tt > instruction, this instruction may be code generated in
different ways. For example, it could be generated as a series of chained
conditional branches or with a lookup table.< / p >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
< pre >
< i > ; Emulate a conditional br instruction< / i >
2007-01-12 03:35:51 +00:00
%Val = < a href = "#i_zext" > zext< / a > i1 %value to i32
2009-01-04 23:44:43 +00:00
switch i32 %Val, label %truedest [ i32 0, label %falsedest ]
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
< i > ; Emulate an unconditional br instruction< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
switch i32 0, label %dest [ ]
2004-02-24 04:54:45 +00:00
< i > ; Implement a jump table:< / i >
2009-01-04 23:44:43 +00:00
switch i32 %val, label %otherwise [ i32 0, label %onzero
i32 1, label %onone
i32 2, label %ontwo ]
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
2009-10-27 19:13:16 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2009-10-28 00:19:10 +00:00
< a name = "i_indirectbr" > '< tt > indirectbr< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2009-10-27 19:13:16 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-28 00:19:10 +00:00
indirectbr < somety> * < address> , [ label < dest1> , label < dest2> , ... ]
2009-10-27 19:13:16 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-10-28 00:19:10 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > indirectbr< / tt > ' instruction implements an indirect branch to a label
2009-10-27 19:13:16 +00:00
within the current function, whose address is specified by
2009-10-27 21:01:34 +00:00
"< tt > address< / tt > ". Address must be derived from a < a
href="#blockaddress">blockaddress< / a > constant.< / p >
2009-10-27 19:13:16 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > address< / tt > ' argument is the address of the label to jump to. The
rest of the arguments indicate the full set of possible destinations that the
address may point to. Blocks are allowed to occur multiple times in the
destination list, though this isn't particularly useful.< / p >
< p > This destination list is required so that dataflow analysis has an accurate
understanding of the CFG.< / p >
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > Control transfers to the block specified in the address argument. All
possible destination blocks must be listed in the label list, otherwise this
instruction has undefined behavior. This implies that jumps to labels
defined in other functions have undefined behavior as well.< / p >
< h5 > Implementation:< / h5 >
< p > This is typically implemented with a jump through a register.< / p >
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-28 00:19:10 +00:00
indirectbr i8* %Addr, [ label %bb1, label %bb2, label %bb3 ]
2009-10-27 19:13:16 +00:00
< / pre >
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_invoke" > '< tt > invoke< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< pre >
2008-10-07 17:48:33 +00:00
< result> = invoke [< a href = "#callingconv" > cconv< / a > ] [< a href = "#paramattrs" > ret attrs< / a > ] < ptr to function ty> < function ptr val> (< function args> ) [< a href = "#fnattrs" > fn attrs< / a > ]
2006-05-14 18:23:06 +00:00
to label < normal label> unwind label < exception label>
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< / pre >
2002-05-06 22:08:29 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > invoke< / tt > ' instruction causes control to transfer to a specified
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
function, with the possibility of control flow transfer to either the
'< tt > normal< / tt > ' label or the '< tt > exception< / tt > ' label. If the callee
function returns with the "< tt > < a href = "#i_ret" > ret< / a > < / tt > " instruction,
control flow will return to the "normal" label. If the callee (or any
indirect callees) returns with the "< a href = "#i_unwind" > < tt > unwind< / tt > < / a > "
instruction, control is interrupted and continued at the dynamically nearest
"exception" label.< / p >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > This instruction requires several arguments:< / p >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< ol >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< li > The optional "cconv" marker indicates which < a href = "#callingconv" > calling
convention< / a > the call should use. If none is specified, the call
defaults to using C calling conventions.< / li >
2008-10-06 18:50:38 +00:00
< li > The optional < a href = "#paramattrs" > Parameter Attributes< / a > list for
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
return values. Only '< tt > zeroext< / tt > ', '< tt > signext< / tt > ', and
'< tt > inreg< / tt > ' attributes are valid here.< / li >
2008-10-06 18:50:38 +00:00
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< li > '< tt > ptr to function ty< / tt > ': shall be the signature of the pointer to
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
function value being invoked. In most cases, this is a direct function
invocation, but indirect < tt > invoke< / tt > s are just as possible, branching
off an arbitrary pointer to function value.< / li >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< li > '< tt > function ptr val< / tt > ': An LLVM value containing a pointer to a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
function to be invoked. < / li >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< li > '< tt > function args< / tt > ': argument list whose types match the function
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
signature argument types. If the function signature indicates the
function accepts a variable number of arguments, the extra arguments can
be specified.< / li >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< li > '< tt > normal label< / tt > ': the label reached when the called function
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
executes a '< tt > < a href = "#i_ret" > ret< / a > < / tt > ' instruction. < / li >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< li > '< tt > exception label< / tt > ': the label reached when a callee returns with
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the < a href = "#i_unwind" > < tt > unwind< / tt > < / a > instruction. < / li >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
2008-10-07 17:48:33 +00:00
< li > The optional < a href = "#fnattrs" > function attributes< / a > list. Only
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
'< tt > noreturn< / tt > ', '< tt > nounwind< / tt > ', '< tt > readonly< / tt > ' and
'< tt > readnone< / tt > ' attributes are valid here.< / li >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / ol >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This instruction is designed to operate as a standard
'< tt > < a href = "#i_call" > call< / a > < / tt > ' instruction in most regards. The
primary difference is that it establishes an association with a label, which
is used by the runtime library to unwind the stack.< / p >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< p > This instruction is used in languages with destructors to ensure that proper
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
cleanup is performed in the case of either a < tt > longjmp< / tt > or a thrown
exception. Additionally, this is important for implementation of
'< tt > catch< / tt > ' clauses in high-level languages that support them.< / p >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > For the purposes of the SSA form, the definition of the value returned by the
'< tt > invoke< / tt > ' instruction is deemed to occur on the edge from the current
block to the "normal" label. If the callee unwinds then no return value is
available.< / p >
2009-05-22 21:47:08 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2005-05-06 22:57:40 +00:00
< pre >
2008-03-16 07:18:12 +00:00
%retval = invoke i32 @Test(i32 15) to label %Continue
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
unwind label %TestCleanup < i > ; {i32}:retval set< / i >
2008-03-16 07:18:12 +00:00
%retval = invoke < a href = "#callingconv" > coldcc< / a > i32 %Testfnptr(i32 15) to label %Continue
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
unwind label %TestCleanup < i > ; {i32}:retval set< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / div >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
2003-09-03 00:41:47 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_unwind" > '< tt > unwind< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
2003-09-03 00:41:47 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
< pre >
unwind
< / pre >
2003-09-03 00:41:47 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > unwind< / tt > ' instruction unwinds the stack, continuing control flow
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
at the first callee in the dynamic call stack which used
an < a href = "#i_invoke" > < tt > invoke< / tt > < / a > instruction to perform the call.
This is primarily used to implement exception handling.< / p >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
2003-09-03 00:41:47 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2008-04-19 21:01:16 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > unwind< / tt > ' instruction causes execution of the current function to
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
immediately halt. The dynamic call stack is then searched for the
first < a href = "#i_invoke" > < tt > invoke< / tt > < / a > instruction on the call stack.
Once found, execution continues at the "exceptional" destination block
specified by the < tt > invoke< / tt > instruction. If there is no < tt > invoke< / tt >
instruction in the dynamic call chain, undefined behavior results.< / p >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_unreachable" > '< tt > unreachable< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
unreachable
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > unreachable< / tt > ' instruction has no defined semantics. This
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
instruction is used to inform the optimizer that a particular portion of the
code is not reachable. This can be used to indicate that the code after a
no-return function cannot be reached, and other facts.< / p >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > unreachable< / tt > ' instruction has no defined semantics.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / div >
2004-10-16 18:04:13 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "binaryops" > Binary Operations< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Binary operators are used to do most of the computation in a program. They
require two operands of the same type, execute an operation on them, and
produce a single value. The operands might represent multiple data, as is
the case with the < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > data type. The result value
has the same type as its operands.< / p >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > There are several different binary operators:< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_add" > '< tt > add< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
2009-07-20 22:41:19 +00:00
< result> = add < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2009-09-02 17:31:42 +00:00
< result> = add nuw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
< result> = add nsw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
< result> = add nuw nsw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > add< / tt > ' instruction returns the sum of its two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > add< / tt > ' instruction must
be < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
integer values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< p > The value produced is the integer sum of the two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > If the sum has unsigned overflow, the result returned is the mathematical
result modulo 2< sup > n< / sup > , where n is the bit width of the result.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Because LLVM integers use a two's complement representation, this instruction
is appropriate for both signed and unsigned integers.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-22 22:44:56 +00:00
< p > < tt > nuw< / tt > and < tt > nsw< / tt > stand for " No Unsigned Wrap"
and " No Signed Wrap" , respectively. If the < tt > nuw< / tt > and/or
< tt > nsw< / tt > keywords are present, the result value of the < tt > add< / tt >
is undefined if unsigned and/or signed overflow, respectively, occurs.< / p >
2009-07-20 22:41:19 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = add i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 + %var< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_fadd" > '< tt > fadd< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = fadd < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > fadd< / tt > ' instruction returns the sum of its two operands.< / p >
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > fadd< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
floating point values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The value produced is the floating point sum of the two operands.< / p >
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = fadd float 4.0, %var < i > ; yields {float}:result = 4.0 + %var< / i >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_sub" > '< tt > sub< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
2009-07-22 22:44:56 +00:00
< result> = sub < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2009-09-02 17:31:42 +00:00
< result> = sub nuw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
< result> = sub nsw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
< result> = sub nuw nsw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > sub< / tt > ' instruction returns the difference of its two
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< p > Note that the '< tt > sub< / tt > ' instruction is used to represent the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
'< tt > neg< / tt > ' instruction present in most other intermediate
representations.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > sub< / tt > ' instruction must
be < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
integer values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< p > The value produced is the integer difference of the two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< p > If the difference has unsigned overflow, the result returned is the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
mathematical result modulo 2< sup > n< / sup > , where n is the bit width of the
result.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Because LLVM integers use a two's complement representation, this instruction
is appropriate for both signed and unsigned integers.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-22 22:44:56 +00:00
< p > < tt > nuw< / tt > and < tt > nsw< / tt > stand for " No Unsigned Wrap"
and " No Signed Wrap" , respectively. If the < tt > nuw< / tt > and/or
< tt > nsw< / tt > keywords are present, the result value of the < tt > sub< / tt >
is undefined if unsigned and/or signed overflow, respectively, occurs.< / p >
2009-07-20 22:41:19 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2007-05-29 09:42:13 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = sub i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 - %var< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< result> = sub i32 0, %val < i > ; yields {i32}:result = -%var< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_fsub" > '< tt > fsub< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = fsub < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > fsub< / tt > ' instruction returns the difference of its two
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
operands.< / p >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< p > Note that the '< tt > fsub< / tt > ' instruction is used to represent the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
'< tt > fneg< / tt > ' instruction present in most other intermediate
representations.< / p >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:32:41 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > fsub< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
floating point values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The value produced is the floating point difference of the two operands.< / p >
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = fsub float 4.0, %var < i > ; yields {float}:result = 4.0 - %var< / i >
< result> = fsub float -0.0, %val < i > ; yields {float}:result = -%var< / i >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_mul" > '< tt > mul< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
2009-07-22 22:44:56 +00:00
< result> = mul < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2009-09-02 17:31:42 +00:00
< result> = mul nuw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
< result> = mul nsw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
< result> = mul nuw nsw < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > mul< / tt > ' instruction returns the product of its two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > mul< / tt > ' instruction must
be < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
integer values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< p > The value produced is the integer product of the two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > If the result of the multiplication has unsigned overflow, the result
returned is the mathematical result modulo 2< sup > n< / sup > , where n is the bit
width of the result.< / p >
< p > Because LLVM integers use a two's complement representation, and the result
is the same width as the operands, this instruction returns the correct
result for both signed and unsigned integers. If a full product
(e.g. < tt > i32< / tt > x< tt > i32< / tt > ->< tt > i64< / tt > ) is needed, the operands should
be sign-extended or zero-extended as appropriate to the width of the full
product.< / p >
2009-07-22 22:44:56 +00:00
< p > < tt > nuw< / tt > and < tt > nsw< / tt > stand for " No Unsigned Wrap"
and " No Signed Wrap" , respectively. If the < tt > nuw< / tt > and/or
< tt > nsw< / tt > keywords are present, the result value of the < tt > mul< / tt >
is undefined if unsigned and/or signed overflow, respectively, occurs.< / p >
2009-07-20 22:41:19 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = mul i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 * %var< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_fmul" > '< tt > fmul< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = fmul < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fmul< / tt > ' instruction returns the product of its two operands.< / p >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > fmul< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
floating point values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The value produced is the floating point product of the two operands.< / p >
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = fmul float 4.0, %var < i > ; yields {float}:result = 4.0 * %var< / i >
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2009-06-04 22:49:04 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_udiv" > '< tt > udiv< / tt > ' Instruction
< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = udiv < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > udiv< / tt > ' instruction returns the quotient of its two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > udiv< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > The value produced is the unsigned integer quotient of the two operands.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > Note that unsigned integer division and signed integer division are distinct
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
operations; for signed integer division, use '< tt > sdiv< / tt > '.< / p >
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > Division by zero leads to undefined behavior.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = udiv i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 / %var< / i >
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_sdiv" > '< tt > sdiv< / tt > ' Instruction
< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
2009-07-20 22:41:19 +00:00
< result> = sdiv < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2009-09-02 17:31:42 +00:00
< result> = sdiv exact < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< / pre >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > sdiv< / tt > ' instruction returns the quotient of its two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > sdiv< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The value produced is the signed integer quotient of the two operands rounded
towards zero.< / p >
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > Note that signed integer division and unsigned integer division are distinct
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
operations; for unsigned integer division, use '< tt > udiv< / tt > '.< / p >
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > Division by zero leads to undefined behavior. Overflow also leads to
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
undefined behavior; this is a rare case, but can occur, for example, by doing
a 32-bit division of -2147483648 by -1.< / p >
2009-07-22 00:04:19 +00:00
< p > If the < tt > exact< / tt > keyword is present, the result value of the
< tt > sdiv< / tt > is undefined if the result would be rounded or if overflow
would occur.< / p >
2009-07-20 22:41:19 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = sdiv i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 / %var< / i >
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_fdiv" > '< tt > fdiv< / tt > '
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
2008-08-07 21:46:00 +00:00
< result> = fdiv < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > fdiv< / tt > ' instruction returns the quotient of its two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > fdiv< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
floating point values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2006-10-26 06:15:43 +00:00
< p > The value produced is the floating point quotient of the two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = fdiv float 4.0, %var < i > ; yields {float}:result = 4.0 / %var< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_urem" > '< tt > urem< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = urem < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > urem< / tt > ' instruction returns the remainder from the unsigned
division of its two arguments.< / p >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > urem< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > This instruction returns the unsigned integer < i > remainder< / i > of a division.
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
This instruction always performs an unsigned division to get the
remainder.< / p >
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > Note that unsigned integer remainder and signed integer remainder are
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
distinct operations; for signed integer remainder, use '< tt > srem< / tt > '.< / p >
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > Taking the remainder of a division by zero leads to undefined behavior.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = urem i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 % %var< / i >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< / pre >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_srem" > '< tt > srem< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
2008-08-07 21:46:00 +00:00
< result> = srem < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > srem< / tt > ' instruction returns the remainder from the signed
division of its two operands. This instruction can also take
< a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > versions of the values in which case the
elements must be integers.< / p >
2008-01-04 04:33:49 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > srem< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< p > This instruction returns the < i > remainder< / i > of a division (where the result
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
has the same sign as the dividend, < tt > op1< / tt > ), not the < i > modulo< / i >
operator (where the result has the same sign as the divisor, < tt > op2< / tt > ) of
a value. For more information about the difference,
see < a href = "http://mathforum.org/dr.math/problems/anne.4.28.99.html" > The
Math Forum< / a > . For a table of how this is implemented in various languages,
please see < a href = "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation" >
Wikipedia: modulo operation< / a > .< / p >
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > Note that signed integer remainder and unsigned integer remainder are
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
distinct operations; for unsigned integer remainder, use '< tt > urem< / tt > '.< / p >
2008-01-28 00:36:27 +00:00
< p > Taking the remainder of a division by zero leads to undefined behavior.
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
Overflow also leads to undefined behavior; this is a rare case, but can
occur, for example, by taking the remainder of a 32-bit division of
-2147483648 by -1. (The remainder doesn't actually overflow, but this rule
lets srem be implemented using instructions that return both the result of
the division and the remainder.)< / p >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = srem i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 % %var< / i >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< / pre >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_frem" > '< tt > frem< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / div >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = frem < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > frem< / tt > ' instruction returns the remainder from the division of
its two operands.< / p >
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > frem< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
floating point values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This instruction returns the < i > remainder< / i > of a division. The remainder
has the same sign as the dividend.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-11-02 01:53:59 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = frem float 4.0, %var < i > ; yields {float}:result = 4.0 % %var< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
2007-02-02 13:57:07 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "bitwiseops" > Bitwise Binary
Operations< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-02-02 13:57:07 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Bitwise binary operators are used to do various forms of bit-twiddling in a
program. They are generally very efficient instructions and can commonly be
strength reduced from other instructions. They require two operands of the
same type, execute an operation on them, and produce a single value. The
resulting value is the same type as its operands.< / p >
2007-02-02 13:57:07 +00:00
< / div >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_shl" > '< tt > shl< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = shl < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-10-03 21:01:14 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > shl< / tt > ' instruction returns the first operand shifted to the left
a specified number of bits.< / p >
2007-10-03 21:01:14 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Both arguments to the '< tt > shl< / tt > ' instruction must be the
same < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of
integer type. '< tt > op2< / tt > ' is treated as an unsigned value.< / p >
2007-10-03 21:01:14 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The value produced is < tt > op1< / tt > * 2< sup > < tt > op2< / tt > < / sup > mod
2< sup > n< / sup > , where < tt > n< / tt > is the width of the result. If < tt > op2< / tt >
is (statically or dynamically) negative or equal to or larger than the number
of bits in < tt > op1< / tt > , the result is undefined. If the arguments are
vectors, each vector element of < tt > op1< / tt > is shifted by the corresponding
shift amount in < tt > op2< / tt > .< / p >
2007-10-03 21:01:14 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< result> = shl i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}: 4 < < %var< / i >
< result> = shl i32 4, 2 < i > ; yields {i32}: 16< / i >
< result> = shl i32 1, 10 < i > ; yields {i32}: 1024< / i >
2007-10-03 21:01:14 +00:00
< result> = shl i32 1, 32 < i > ; undefined< / i >
2008-12-09 05:46:39 +00:00
< result> = shl < 2 x i32> < i32 1, i32 1> , < i32 1, i32 2> < i > ; yields: result=< 2 x i32> < i32 2, i32 4> < / i >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_lshr" > '< tt > lshr< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = lshr < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > lshr< / tt > ' instruction (logical shift right) returns the first
operand shifted to the right a specified number of bits with zero fill.< / p >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > Both arguments to the '< tt > lshr< / tt > ' instruction must be the same
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
type. '< tt > op2< / tt > ' is treated as an unsigned value.< / p >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > This instruction always performs a logical shift right operation. The most
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
significant bits of the result will be filled with zero bits after the shift.
If < tt > op2< / tt > is (statically or dynamically) equal to or larger than the
number of bits in < tt > op1< / tt > , the result is undefined. If the arguments are
vectors, each vector element of < tt > op1< / tt > is shifted by the corresponding
shift amount in < tt > op2< / tt > .< / p >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = lshr i32 4, 1 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 2< / i >
< result> = lshr i32 4, 2 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 1< / i >
< result> = lshr i8 4, 3 < i > ; yields {i8}:result = 0< / i >
< result> = lshr i8 -2, 1 < i > ; yields {i8}:result = 0x7FFFFFFF < / i >
2007-10-03 21:01:14 +00:00
< result> = lshr i32 1, 32 < i > ; undefined< / i >
2008-12-09 05:46:39 +00:00
< result> = lshr < 2 x i32> < i32 -2, i32 4> , < i32 1, i32 2> < i > ; yields: result=< 2 x i32> < i32 0x7FFFFFFF, i32 1> < / i >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / div >
2007-02-02 13:57:07 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_ashr" > '< tt > ashr< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = ashr < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > ashr< / tt > ' instruction (arithmetic shift right) returns the first
operand shifted to the right a specified number of bits with sign
extension.< / p >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > Both arguments to the '< tt > ashr< / tt > ' instruction must be the same
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
type. '< tt > op2< / tt > ' is treated as an unsigned value.< / p >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This instruction always performs an arithmetic shift right operation, The
most significant bits of the result will be filled with the sign bit
of < tt > op1< / tt > . If < tt > op2< / tt > is (statically or dynamically) equal to or
larger than the number of bits in < tt > op1< / tt > , the result is undefined. If
the arguments are vectors, each vector element of < tt > op1< / tt > is shifted by
the corresponding shift amount in < tt > op2< / tt > .< / p >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = ashr i32 4, 1 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 2< / i >
< result> = ashr i32 4, 2 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 1< / i >
< result> = ashr i8 4, 3 < i > ; yields {i8}:result = 0< / i >
< result> = ashr i8 -2, 1 < i > ; yields {i8}:result = -1< / i >
2007-10-03 21:01:14 +00:00
< result> = ashr i32 1, 32 < i > ; undefined< / i >
2008-12-09 05:46:39 +00:00
< result> = ashr < 2 x i32> < i32 -2, i32 4> , < i32 1, i32 3> < i > ; yields: result=< 2 x i32> < i32 -1, i32 0> < / i >
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-31 21:39:12 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_and" > '< tt > and< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
2008-08-07 21:46:00 +00:00
< result> = and < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > and< / tt > ' instruction returns the bitwise logical and of its two
operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > and< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The truth table used for the '< tt > and< / tt > ' instruction is:< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< table border = "1" cellspacing = "0" cellpadding = "4" >
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< tbody >
< tr >
< td > In0< / td >
< td > In1< / td >
< td > Out< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< / tr >
< / tbody >
< / table >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = and i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 & %var< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< result> = and i32 15, 40 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 8< / i >
< result> = and i32 4, 8 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 0< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_or" > '< tt > or< / tt > ' Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = or < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > or< / tt > ' instruction returns the bitwise logical inclusive or of its
two operands.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > or< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The truth table used for the '< tt > or< / tt > ' instruction is:< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< table border = "1" cellspacing = "0" cellpadding = "4" >
< tbody >
< tr >
< td > In0< / td >
< td > In1< / td >
< td > Out< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< / tr >
< / tbody >
< / table >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = or i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 | %var< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< result> = or i32 15, 40 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 47< / i >
< result> = or i32 4, 8 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 12< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_xor" > '< tt > xor< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = xor < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {ty}:result< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > xor< / tt > ' instruction returns the bitwise logical exclusive or of
its two operands. The < tt > xor< / tt > is used to implement the "one's
complement" operation, which is the "~" operator in C.< / p >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< p > The two arguments to the '< tt > xor< / tt > ' instruction must be
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of integer
values. Both arguments must have identical types.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The truth table used for the '< tt > xor< / tt > ' instruction is:< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< table border = "1" cellspacing = "0" cellpadding = "4" >
< tbody >
< tr >
< td > In0< / td >
< td > In1< / td >
< td > Out< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< / tr >
< tr >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 1< / td >
< td > 0< / td >
< / tr >
< / tbody >
< / table >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = xor i32 4, %var < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 4 ^ %var< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< result> = xor i32 15, 40 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 39< / i >
< result> = xor i32 4, 8 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = 12< / i >
< result> = xor i32 %V, -1 < i > ; yields {i32}:result = ~%V< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< a name = "vectorops" > Vector Operations< / a >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< p > LLVM supports several instructions to represent vector operations in a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
target-independent manner. These instructions cover the element-access and
vector-specific operations needed to process vectors effectively. While LLVM
does directly support these vector operations, many sophisticated algorithms
will want to use target-specific intrinsics to take full advantage of a
specific target.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< a name = "i_extractelement" > '< tt > extractelement< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< pre >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< result> = extractelement < n x < ty> > < val> , i32 < idx> < i > ; yields < ty> < / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > extractelement< / tt > ' instruction extracts a single scalar element
from a vector at a specified index.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first operand of an '< tt > extractelement< / tt > ' instruction is a value
of < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > type. The second operand is an index
indicating the position from which to extract the element. The index may be
a variable.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The result is a scalar of the same type as the element type of
< tt > val< / tt > . Its value is the value at position < tt > idx< / tt > of
< tt > val< / tt > . If < tt > idx< / tt > exceeds the length of < tt > val< / tt > , the
results are undefined.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< pre >
2009-10-28 13:14:50 +00:00
< result> = extractelement < 4 x i32> %vec, i32 0 < i > ; yields i32< / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / div >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< a name = "i_insertelement" > '< tt > insertelement< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< pre >
2008-05-12 23:38:42 +00:00
< result> = insertelement < n x < ty> > < val> , < ty> < elt> , i32 < idx> < i > ; yields < n x < ty> > < / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > insertelement< / tt > ' instruction inserts a scalar element into a
vector at a specified index.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first operand of an '< tt > insertelement< / tt > ' instruction is a value
of < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > type. The second operand is a scalar value
whose type must equal the element type of the first operand. The third
operand is an index indicating the position at which to insert the value.
The index may be a variable.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The result is a vector of the same type as < tt > val< / tt > . Its element values
are those of < tt > val< / tt > except at position < tt > idx< / tt > , where it gets the
value < tt > elt< / tt > . If < tt > idx< / tt > exceeds the length of < tt > val< / tt > , the
results are undefined.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< pre >
2009-10-28 13:14:50 +00:00
< result> = insertelement < 4 x i32> %vec, i32 1, i32 0 < i > ; yields < 4 x i32> < / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< a name = "i_shufflevector" > '< tt > shufflevector< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< pre >
2008-11-10 04:46:22 +00:00
< result> = shufflevector < n x < ty> > < v1> , < n x < ty> > < v2> , < m x i32> < mask> < i > ; yields < m x < ty> > < / i >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > shufflevector< / tt > ' instruction constructs a permutation of elements
from two input vectors, returning a vector with the same element type as the
input and length that is the same as the shuffle mask.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first two operands of a '< tt > shufflevector< / tt > ' instruction are vectors
with types that match each other. The third argument is a shuffle mask whose
element type is always 'i32'. The result of the instruction is a vector
whose length is the same as the shuffle mask and whose element type is the
same as the element type of the first two operands.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The shuffle mask operand is required to be a constant vector with either
constant integer or undef values.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The elements of the two input vectors are numbered from left to right across
both of the vectors. The shuffle mask operand specifies, for each element of
the result vector, which element of the two input vectors the result element
gets. The element selector may be undef (meaning "don't care") and the
second operand may be undef if performing a shuffle from only one vector.< / p >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
< pre >
2009-10-28 13:14:50 +00:00
< result> = shufflevector < 4 x i32> %v1, < 4 x i32> %v2,
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
< 4 x i32> < i32 0, i32 4, i32 1, i32 5> < i > ; yields < 4 x i32> < / i >
2009-10-28 13:14:50 +00:00
< result> = shufflevector < 4 x i32> %v1, < 4 x i32> undef,
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< 4 x i32> < i32 0, i32 1, i32 2, i32 3> < i > ; yields < 4 x i32> < / i > - Identity shuffle.
2009-10-28 13:14:50 +00:00
< result> = shufflevector < 8 x i32> %v1, < 8 x i32> undef,
2008-11-10 04:46:22 +00:00
< 4 x i32> < i32 0, i32 1, i32 2, i32 3> < i > ; yields < 4 x i32> < / i >
2009-10-28 13:14:50 +00:00
< result> = shufflevector < 4 x i32> %v1, < 4 x i32> %v2,
2008-11-10 04:46:22 +00:00
< 8 x i32> < i32 0, i32 1, i32 2, i32 3, i32 4, i32 5, i32 6, i32 7 > < i > ; yields < 8 x i32> < / i >
2002-04-14 06:13:44 +00:00
< / pre >
2005-11-06 08:02:57 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / div >
2006-04-14 19:24:33 +00:00
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "aggregateops" > Aggregate Operations< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM supports several instructions for working with aggregate values.< / p >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_extractvalue" > '< tt > extractvalue< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = extractvalue < aggregate type> < val> , < idx> {, < idx> }*
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > extractvalue< / tt > ' instruction extracts the value of a struct field
or array element from an aggregate value.< / p >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first operand of an '< tt > extractvalue< / tt > ' instruction is a value
of < a href = "#t_struct" > struct< / a > or < a href = "#t_array" > array< / a > type. The
operands are constant indices to specify which value to extract in a similar
manner as indices in a
'< tt > < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > getelementptr< / a > < / tt > ' instruction.< / p >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The result is the value at the position in the aggregate specified by the
index operands.< / p >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-28 13:14:50 +00:00
< result> = extractvalue {i32, float} %agg, 0 < i > ; yields i32< / i >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / div >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_insertvalue" > '< tt > insertvalue< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2008-05-31 00:58:22 +00:00
< result> = insertvalue < aggregate type> < val> , < ty> < val> , < idx> < i > ; yields < n x < ty> > < / i >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > insertvalue< / tt > ' instruction inserts a value into a struct field or
array element in an aggregate.< / p >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first operand of an '< tt > insertvalue< / tt > ' instruction is a value
of < a href = "#t_struct" > struct< / a > or < a href = "#t_array" > array< / a > type. The
second operand is a first-class value to insert. The following operands are
constant indices indicating the position at which to insert the value in a
similar manner as indices in a
'< tt > < a href = "#i_getelementptr" > getelementptr< / a > < / tt > ' instruction. The
value to insert must have the same type as the value identified by the
indices.< / p >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The result is an aggregate of the same type as < tt > val< / tt > . Its value is
that of < tt > val< / tt > except that the value at the position specified by the
indices is that of < tt > elt< / tt > .< / p >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-28 13:14:50 +00:00
< result> = insertvalue {i32, float} %agg, i32 1, 0 < i > ; yields {i32, float}< / i >
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-05-12 23:51:09 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2006-08-15 00:45:58 +00:00
< a name = "memoryops" > Memory Access and Addressing Operations< / a >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > A key design point of an SSA-based representation is how it represents
memory. In LLVM, no memory locations are in SSA form, which makes things
2009-10-26 23:44:29 +00:00
very simple. This section describes how to read, write, and allocate
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
memory in LLVM.< / p >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-03-12 05:50:16 +00:00
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_alloca" > '< tt > alloca< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< pre >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< result> = alloca < type> [, i32 < NumElements> ][, align < alignment> ] < i > ; yields {type*}:result< / i >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > alloca< / tt > ' instruction allocates memory on the stack frame of the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
currently executing function, to be automatically released when this function
returns to its caller. The object is always allocated in the generic address
space (address space zero).< / p >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > alloca< / tt > ' instruction
allocates < tt > sizeof(< type> )*NumElements< / tt > bytes of memory on the
runtime stack, returning a pointer of the appropriate type to the program.
If "NumElements" is specified, it is the number of elements allocated,
otherwise "NumElements" is defaulted to be one. If a constant alignment is
specified, the value result of the allocation is guaranteed to be aligned to
at least that boundary. If not specified, or if zero, the target can choose
to align the allocation on any convenient boundary compatible with the
type.< / p >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< p > '< tt > type< / tt > ' may be any sized type.< / p >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-05-08 20:49:29 +00:00
< p > Memory is allocated; a pointer is returned. The operation is undefined if
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
there is insufficient stack space for the allocation. '< tt > alloca< / tt > 'd
memory is automatically released when the function returns. The
'< tt > alloca< / tt > ' instruction is commonly used to represent automatic
variables that must have an address available. When the function returns
(either with the < tt > < a href = "#i_ret" > ret< / a > < / tt >
or < tt > < a href = "#i_unwind" > unwind< / a > < / tt > instructions), the memory is
reclaimed. Allocating zero bytes is legal, but the result is undefined.< / p >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< pre >
2009-01-04 23:49:44 +00:00
%ptr = alloca i32 < i > ; yields {i32*}:ptr< / i >
%ptr = alloca i32, i32 4 < i > ; yields {i32*}:ptr< / i >
%ptr = alloca i32, i32 4, align 1024 < i > ; yields {i32*}:ptr< / i >
%ptr = alloca i32, align 1024 < i > ; yields {i32*}:ptr< / i >
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_load" > '< tt > load< / tt > '
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = load < ty> * < pointer> [, align < alignment> ]
< result> = volatile load < ty> * < pointer> [, align < alignment> ]
< / pre >
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > load< / tt > ' instruction is used to read from memory.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The argument to the '< tt > load< / tt > ' instruction specifies the memory address
from which to load. The pointer must point to
a < a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > type. If the < tt > load< / tt > is
marked as < tt > volatile< / tt > , then the optimizer is not allowed to modify the
number or order of execution of this < tt > load< / tt > with other
volatile < tt > load< / tt > and < tt > < a href = "#i_store" > store< / a > < / tt >
instructions. < / p >
< p > The optional constant "align" argument specifies the alignment of the
operation (that is, the alignment of the memory address). A value of 0 or an
omitted "align" argument means that the operation has the preferential
alignment for the target. It is the responsibility of the code emitter to
ensure that the alignment information is correct. Overestimating the
alignment results in an undefined behavior. Underestimating the alignment may
produce less efficient code. An alignment of 1 is always safe.< / p >
2006-03-14 20:55:28 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The location of memory pointed to is loaded. If the value being loaded is of
scalar type then the number of bytes read does not exceed the minimum number
of bytes needed to hold all bits of the type. For example, loading an
< tt > i24< / tt > reads at most three bytes. When loading a value of a type like
< tt > i20< / tt > with a size that is not an integral number of bytes, the result
is undefined if the value was not originally written using a store of the
same type.< / p >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
%ptr = < a href = "#i_alloca" > alloca< / a > i32 < i > ; yields {i32*}:ptr< / i >
< a href = "#i_store" > store< / a > i32 3, i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {void}< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%val = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:val = i32 3< / i >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_store" > '< tt > store< / tt > '
Instruction< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-09 21:18:01 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
store < ty> < value> , < ty> * < pointer> [, align < alignment> ] < i > ; yields {void}< / i >
2007-04-21 08:16:25 +00:00
volatile store < ty> < value> , < ty> * < pointer> [, align < alignment> ] < i > ; yields {void}< / i >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > store< / tt > ' instruction is used to write to memory.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > There are two arguments to the '< tt > store< / tt > ' instruction: a value to store
and an address at which to store it. The type of the
'< tt > < pointer> < / tt > ' operand must be a pointer to
the < a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > type of the
'< tt > < value> < / tt > ' operand. If the < tt > store< / tt > is marked
as < tt > volatile< / tt > , then the optimizer is not allowed to modify the number
or order of execution of this < tt > store< / tt > with other
volatile < tt > load< / tt > and < tt > < a href = "#i_store" > store< / a > < / tt >
instructions.< / p >
< p > The optional constant "align" argument specifies the alignment of the
operation (that is, the alignment of the memory address). A value of 0 or an
omitted "align" argument means that the operation has the preferential
alignment for the target. It is the responsibility of the code emitter to
ensure that the alignment information is correct. Overestimating the
alignment results in an undefined behavior. Underestimating the alignment may
produce less efficient code. An alignment of 1 is always safe.< / p >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The contents of memory are updated to contain '< tt > < value> < / tt > ' at the
location specified by the '< tt > < pointer> < / tt > ' operand. If
'< tt > < value> < / tt > ' is of scalar type then the number of bytes written
does not exceed the minimum number of bytes needed to hold all bits of the
type. For example, storing an < tt > i24< / tt > writes at most three bytes. When
writing a value of a type like < tt > i20< / tt > with a size that is not an
integral number of bytes, it is unspecified what happens to the extra bits
that do not belong to the type, but they will typically be overwritten.< / p >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
%ptr = < a href = "#i_alloca" > alloca< / a > i32 < i > ; yields {i32*}:ptr< / i >
2007-10-22 05:10:05 +00:00
store i32 3, i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {void}< / i >
%val = < a href = "#i_load" > load< / a > i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:val = i32 3< / i >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-09 21:15:49 +00:00
< / div >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< a name = "i_getelementptr" > '< tt > getelementptr< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2008-10-13 13:44:15 +00:00
< result> = getelementptr < pty> * < ptrval> {, < ty> < idx> }*
2009-07-27 21:53:46 +00:00
< result> = getelementptr inbounds < pty> * < ptrval> {, < ty> < idx> }*
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > getelementptr< / tt > ' instruction is used to get the address of a
subelement of an aggregate data structure. It performs address calculation
only and does not access memory.< / p >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2008-10-13 13:44:15 +00:00
< p > The first argument is always a pointer, and forms the basis of the
2009-07-29 06:44:13 +00:00
calculation. The remaining arguments are indices that indicate which of the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
elements of the aggregate object are indexed. The interpretation of each
index is dependent on the type being indexed into. The first index always
indexes the pointer value given as the first argument, the second index
indexes a value of the type pointed to (not necessarily the value directly
pointed to, since the first index can be non-zero), etc. The first type
indexed into must be a pointer value, subsequent types can be arrays, vectors
and structs. Note that subsequent types being indexed into can never be
pointers, since that would require loading the pointer before continuing
calculation.< / p >
2008-10-13 13:44:15 +00:00
< p > The type of each index argument depends on the type it is indexing into.
2009-07-29 06:44:13 +00:00
When indexing into a (optionally packed) structure, only < tt > i32< / tt > integer
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< b > constants< / b > are allowed. When indexing into an array, pointer or
2009-07-29 06:44:13 +00:00
vector, integers of any width are allowed, and they are not required to be
constant.< / p >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > For example, let's consider a C code fragment and how it gets compiled to
LLVM:< / p >
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
< pre >
struct RT {
char A;
2007-05-29 15:43:56 +00:00
int B[10][20];
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
char C;
};
struct ST {
2007-05-29 15:43:56 +00:00
int X;
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
double Y;
struct RT Z;
};
2007-05-29 15:43:56 +00:00
int *foo(struct ST *s) {
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
return & s[1].Z.B[5][13];
}
2006-02-17 21:18:08 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2004-03-12 05:50:16 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< p > The LLVM code generated by the GCC frontend is:< / p >
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< pre >
2009-01-11 20:53:49 +00:00
%RT = < a href = "#namedtypes" > type< / a > { i8 , [10 x [20 x i32]], i8 }
%ST = < a href = "#namedtypes" > type< / a > { i32, double, %RT }
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
2009-07-25 02:23:48 +00:00
define i32* @foo(%ST* %s) {
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
entry:
%reg = getelementptr %ST* %s, i32 1, i32 2, i32 1, i32 5, i32 13
ret i32* %reg
}
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
< / pre >
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > In the example above, the first index is indexing into the '< tt > %ST*< / tt > '
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
type, which is a pointer, yielding a '< tt > %ST< / tt > ' = '< tt > { i32, double, %RT
}< / tt > ' type, a structure. The second index indexes into the third element
of the structure, yielding a '< tt > %RT< / tt > ' = '< tt > { i8 , [10 x [20 x i32]],
i8 }< / tt > ' type, another structure. The third index indexes into the second
element of the structure, yielding a '< tt > [10 x [20 x i32]]< / tt > ' type, an
array. The two dimensions of the array are subscripted into, yielding an
'< tt > i32< / tt > ' type. The '< tt > getelementptr< / tt > ' instruction returns a
pointer to this element, thus computing a value of '< tt > i32*< / tt > ' type.< / p >
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that it is perfectly legal to index partially through a structure,
returning a pointer to an inner element. Because of this, the LLVM code for
the given testcase is equivalent to:< / p >
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< pre >
2009-07-25 02:23:48 +00:00
define i32* @foo(%ST* %s) {
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%t1 = getelementptr %ST* %s, i32 1 < i > ; yields %ST*:%t1< / i >
2007-04-22 01:17:39 +00:00
%t2 = getelementptr %ST* %t1, i32 0, i32 2 < i > ; yields %RT*:%t2< / i >
%t3 = getelementptr %RT* %t2, i32 0, i32 1 < i > ; yields [10 x [20 x i32]]*:%t3< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%t4 = getelementptr [10 x [20 x i32]]* %t3, i32 0, i32 5 < i > ; yields [20 x i32]*:%t4< / i >
%t5 = getelementptr [20 x i32]* %t4, i32 0, i32 13 < i > ; yields i32*:%t5< / i >
ret i32* %t5
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
}
< / pre >
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
2009-07-27 21:53:46 +00:00
< p > If the < tt > inbounds< / tt > keyword is present, the result value of the
2009-07-29 16:00:30 +00:00
< tt > getelementptr< / tt > is undefined if the base pointer is not an
< i > in bounds< / i > address of an allocated object, or if any of the addresses
2009-08-20 17:08:17 +00:00
that would be formed by successive addition of the offsets implied by the
indices to the base address with infinitely precise arithmetic are not an
< i > in bounds< / i > address of that allocated object.
2009-07-29 16:00:30 +00:00
The < i > in bounds< / i > addresses for an allocated object are all the addresses
2009-08-20 17:08:17 +00:00
that point into the object, plus the address one byte past the end.< / p >
2009-07-27 21:53:46 +00:00
< p > If the < tt > inbounds< / tt > keyword is not present, the offsets are added to
the base address with silently-wrapping two's complement arithmetic, and
the result value of the < tt > getelementptr< / tt > may be outside the object
pointed to by the base pointer. The result value may not necessarily be
used to access memory though, even if it happens to point into allocated
storage. See the < a href = "#pointeraliasing" > Pointer Aliasing Rules< / a >
section for more information.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The getelementptr instruction is often confusing. For some more insight into
how it works, see < a href = "GetElementPtr.html" > the getelementptr FAQ< / a > .< / p >
2006-08-15 00:45:58 +00:00
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< i > ; yields [12 x i8]*:aptr< / i >
2008-10-13 13:44:15 +00:00
%aptr = getelementptr {i32, [12 x i8]}* %saptr, i64 0, i32 1
< i > ; yields i8*:vptr< / i >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
%vptr = getelementptr {i32, < 2 x i8> }* %svptr, i64 0, i32 1, i32 1
2008-10-13 13:44:15 +00:00
< i > ; yields i8*:eptr< / i >
%eptr = getelementptr [12 x i8]* %aptr, i64 0, i32 1
2009-04-25 07:27:44 +00:00
< i > ; yields i32*:iptr< / i >
2009-04-24 16:38:13 +00:00
%iptr = getelementptr [10 x i32]* @arr, i16 0, i16 0
2006-01-05 17:37:02 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< / div >
2006-11-09 21:15:49 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "convertops" > Conversion Operations< / a >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< p > The instructions in this category are the conversion instructions (casting)
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
which all take a single operand and a type. They perform various bit
conversions on the operand.< / p >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< / div >
2004-03-12 05:50:16 +00:00
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< a name = "i_trunc" > '< tt > trunc .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< result> = trunc < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > trunc< / tt > ' instruction truncates its operand to the
type < tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > trunc< / tt > ' instruction takes a < tt > value< / tt > to trunc, which must
be an < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > type, and a type that specifies the
size and type of the result, which must be
an < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > type. The bit size of < tt > value< / tt > must
be larger than the bit size of < tt > ty2< / tt > . Equal sized types are not
allowed.< / p >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > trunc< / tt > ' instruction truncates the high order bits
in < tt > value< / tt > and converts the remaining bits to < tt > ty2< / tt > . Since the
source size must be larger than the destination size, < tt > trunc< / tt > cannot
be a < i > no-op cast< / i > . It will always truncate bits.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%X = trunc i32 257 to i8 < i > ; yields i8:1< / i >
2007-01-12 03:35:51 +00:00
%Y = trunc i32 123 to i1 < i > ; yields i1:true< / i >
2009-10-28 09:21:30 +00:00
%Z = trunc i32 122 to i1 < i > ; yields i1:false< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_zext" > '< tt > zext .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = zext < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > zext< / tt > ' instruction zero extends its operand to type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > zext< / tt > ' instruction takes a value to cast, which must be of
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > type, and a type to cast it to, which must
also be of < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > type. The bit size of the
< tt > value< / tt > must be smaller than the bit size of the destination type,
< tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< p > The < tt > zext< / tt > fills the high order bits of the < tt > value< / tt > with zero
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
bits until it reaches the size of the destination type, < tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
2007-01-12 15:46:11 +00:00
< p > When zero extending from i1, the result will always be either 0 or 1.< / p >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%X = zext i32 257 to i64 < i > ; yields i64:257< / i >
2007-01-12 03:35:51 +00:00
%Y = zext i1 true to i32 < i > ; yields i32:1< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_sext" > '< tt > sext .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = sext < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > sext< / tt > ' sign extends < tt > value< / tt > to the type < tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > sext< / tt > ' instruction takes a value to cast, which must be of
< a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > type, and a type to cast it to, which must
also be of < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > type. The bit size of the
< tt > value< / tt > must be smaller than the bit size of the destination type,
< tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > sext< / tt > ' instruction performs a sign extension by copying the sign
bit (highest order bit) of the < tt > value< / tt > until it reaches the bit size
of the type < tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
2007-01-12 03:35:51 +00:00
< p > When sign extending from i1, the extension always results in -1 or 0.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%X = sext i8 -1 to i16 < i > ; yields i16 :65535< / i >
2007-01-12 03:35:51 +00:00
%Y = sext i1 true to i32 < i > ; yields i32:-1< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
< a name = "i_fptrunc" > '< tt > fptrunc .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
< result> = fptrunc < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptrunc< / tt > ' instruction truncates < tt > value< / tt > to type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptrunc< / tt > ' instruction takes a < a href = "#t_floating" > floating
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
point< / a > value to cast and a < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > type
to cast it to. The size of < tt > value< / tt > must be larger than the size of
< tt > ty2< / tt > . This implies that < tt > fptrunc< / tt > cannot be used to make a
< i > no-op cast< / i > .< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptrunc< / tt > ' instruction truncates a < tt > value< / tt > from a larger
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > type to a smaller
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > type. If the value cannot fit
within the destination type, < tt > ty2< / tt > , then the results are
undefined.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
%X = fptrunc double 123.0 to float < i > ; yields float:123.0< / i >
%Y = fptrunc double 1.0E+300 to float < i > ; yields undefined< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
< a name = "i_fpext" > '< tt > fpext .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
< result> = fpext < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fpext< / tt > ' extends a floating point < tt > value< / tt > to a larger
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
floating point value.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fpext< / tt > ' instruction takes a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > < tt > value< / tt > to cast, and
a < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > type to cast it to. The source
type must be smaller than the destination type.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fpext< / tt > ' instruction extends the < tt > value< / tt > from a smaller
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > type to a larger
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > type. The < tt > fpext< / tt > cannot be
used to make a < i > no-op cast< / i > because it always changes bits. Use
< tt > bitcast< / tt > to make a < i > no-op cast< / i > for a floating point cast.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-09 21:48:10 +00:00
%X = fpext float 3.1415 to double < i > ; yields double:3.1415< / i >
%Y = fpext float 1.0 to float < i > ; yields float:1.0 (no-op)< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-01-21 00:29:26 +00:00
< a name = "i_fptoui" > '< tt > fptoui .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-07-31 14:40:14 +00:00
< result> = fptoui < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2007-07-31 14:40:14 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptoui< / tt > ' converts a floating point < tt > value< / tt > to its
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
unsigned integer equivalent of type < tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptoui< / tt > ' instruction takes a value to cast, which must be a
scalar or vector < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > value, and a type
to cast it to < tt > ty2< / tt > , which must be an < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a >
type. If < tt > ty< / tt > is a vector floating point type, < tt > ty2< / tt > must be a
vector integer type with the same number of elements as < tt > ty< / tt > < / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptoui< / tt > ' instruction converts its
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > operand into the nearest (rounding
towards zero) unsigned integer value. If the value cannot fit
in < tt > ty2< / tt > , the results are undefined.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-07-31 14:40:14 +00:00
%X = fptoui double 123.0 to i32 < i > ; yields i32:123< / i >
2007-09-22 03:17:52 +00:00
%Y = fptoui float 1.0E+300 to i1 < i > ; yields undefined:1< / i >
2009-10-28 09:21:30 +00:00
%Z = fptoui float 1.04E+17 to i8 < i > ; yields undefined:1< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< a name = "i_fptosi" > '< tt > fptosi .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< result> = fptosi < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptosi< / tt > ' instruction converts
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > < tt > value< / tt > to
type < tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptosi< / tt > ' instruction takes a value to cast, which must be a
scalar or vector < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > value, and a type
to cast it to < tt > ty2< / tt > , which must be an < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a >
type. If < tt > ty< / tt > is a vector floating point type, < tt > ty2< / tt > must be a
vector integer type with the same number of elements as < tt > ty< / tt > < / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fptosi< / tt > ' instruction converts its
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > operand into the nearest (rounding
towards zero) signed integer value. If the value cannot fit in < tt > ty2< / tt > ,
the results are undefined.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-01-12 03:35:51 +00:00
%X = fptosi double -123.0 to i32 < i > ; yields i32:-123< / i >
2007-09-22 03:17:52 +00:00
%Y = fptosi float 1.0E-247 to i1 < i > ; yields undefined:1< / i >
2009-10-28 09:21:30 +00:00
%Z = fptosi float 1.04E+17 to i8 < i > ; yields undefined:1< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< a name = "i_uitofp" > '< tt > uitofp .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< result> = uitofp < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > uitofp< / tt > ' instruction regards < tt > value< / tt > as an unsigned
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
integer and converts that value to the < tt > ty2< / tt > type.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2007-11-17 03:58:34 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > uitofp< / tt > ' instruction takes a value to cast, which must be a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
scalar or vector < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > value, and a type to cast
it to < tt > ty2< / tt > , which must be an < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a >
type. If < tt > ty< / tt > is a vector integer type, < tt > ty2< / tt > must be a vector
floating point type with the same number of elements as < tt > ty< / tt > < / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > uitofp< / tt > ' instruction interprets its operand as an unsigned
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
integer quantity and converts it to the corresponding floating point
value. If the value cannot fit in the floating point value, the results are
undefined.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%X = uitofp i32 257 to float < i > ; yields float:257.0< / i >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
%Y = uitofp i8 -1 to double < i > ; yields double:255.0< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< a name = "i_sitofp" > '< tt > sitofp .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-09 23:03:26 +00:00
< result> = sitofp < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > sitofp< / tt > ' instruction regards < tt > value< / tt > as a signed integer
and converts that value to the < tt > ty2< / tt > type.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2007-11-17 03:58:34 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > sitofp< / tt > ' instruction takes a value to cast, which must be a
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
scalar or vector < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > value, and a type to cast
it to < tt > ty2< / tt > , which must be an < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a >
type. If < tt > ty< / tt > is a vector integer type, < tt > ty2< / tt > must be a vector
floating point type with the same number of elements as < tt > ty< / tt > < / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > sitofp< / tt > ' instruction interprets its operand as a signed integer
quantity and converts it to the corresponding floating point value. If the
value cannot fit in the floating point value, the results are undefined.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< pre >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%X = sitofp i32 257 to float < i > ; yields float:257.0< / i >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
%Y = sitofp i8 -1 to double < i > ; yields double:-1.0< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_ptrtoint" > '< tt > ptrtoint .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = ptrtoint < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > ptrtoint< / tt > ' instruction converts the pointer < tt > value< / tt > to
the integer type < tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > ptrtoint< / tt > ' instruction takes a < tt > value< / tt > to cast, which
must be a < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > value, and a type to cast it to
< tt > ty2< / tt > , which must be an < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > type.< / p >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > ptrtoint< / tt > ' instruction converts < tt > value< / tt > to integer type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > ty2< / tt > by interpreting the pointer value as an integer and either
truncating or zero extending that value to the size of the integer type. If
< tt > value< / tt > is smaller than < tt > ty2< / tt > then a zero extension is done. If
< tt > value< / tt > is larger than < tt > ty2< / tt > then a truncation is done. If they
are the same size, then nothing is done (< i > no-op cast< / i > ) other than a type
change.< / p >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
%X = ptrtoint i32* %X to i8 < i > ; yields truncation on 32-bit architecture< / i >
%Y = ptrtoint i32* %x to i64 < i > ; yields zero extension on 32-bit architecture< / i >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_inttoptr" > '< tt > inttoptr .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
< result> = inttoptr < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > inttoptr< / tt > ' instruction converts an integer < tt > value< / tt > to a
pointer type, < tt > ty2< / tt > .< / p >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2007-03-30 12:22:09 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > inttoptr< / tt > ' instruction takes an < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
value to cast, and a type to cast it to, which must be a
< a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > type.< / p >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > inttoptr< / tt > ' instruction converts < tt > value< / tt > to type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > ty2< / tt > by applying either a zero extension or a truncation depending on
the size of the integer < tt > value< / tt > . If < tt > value< / tt > is larger than the
size of a pointer then a truncation is done. If < tt > value< / tt > is smaller
than the size of a pointer then a zero extension is done. If they are the
same size, nothing is done (< i > no-op cast< / i > ).< / p >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
%X = inttoptr i32 255 to i32* < i > ; yields zero extension on 64-bit architecture< / i >
2009-10-28 09:21:30 +00:00
%Y = inttoptr i32 255 to i32* < i > ; yields no-op on 32-bit architecture< / i >
%Z = inttoptr i64 0 to i32* < i > ; yields truncation on 32-bit architecture< / i >
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-11 21:00:47 +00:00
< / div >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-11-11 23:08:07 +00:00
< a name = "i_bitcast" > '< tt > bitcast .. to< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2006-11-11 23:08:07 +00:00
< result> = bitcast < ty> < value> to < ty2> < i > ; yields ty2< / i >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2006-11-11 23:08:07 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > bitcast< / tt > ' instruction converts < tt > value< / tt > to type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > ty2< / tt > without changing any bits.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > bitcast< / tt > ' instruction takes a value to cast, which must be a
non-aggregate first class value, and a type to cast it to, which must also be
a non-aggregate < a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > type. The bit sizes
of < tt > value< / tt > and the destination type, < tt > ty2< / tt > , must be
identical. If the source type is a pointer, the destination type must also be
a pointer. This instruction supports bitwise conversion of vectors to
integers and to vectors of other types (as long as they have the same
size).< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2006-11-11 23:08:07 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > bitcast< / tt > ' instruction converts < tt > value< / tt > to type
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > ty2< / tt > . It is always a < i > no-op cast< / i > because no bits change with
this conversion. The conversion is done as if the < tt > value< / tt > had been
stored to memory and read back as type < tt > ty2< / tt > . Pointer types may only
be converted to other pointer types with this instruction. To convert
pointers to other types, use the < a href = "#i_inttoptr" > inttoptr< / a > or
< a href = "#i_ptrtoint" > ptrtoint< / a > instructions first.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:11:31 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< pre >
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
%X = bitcast i8 255 to i8 < i > ; yields i8 :-1< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
%Y = bitcast i32* %x to sint* < i > ; yields sint*:%x< / i >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
%Z = bitcast < 2 x int> %V to i64; < i > ; yields i64: %V< / i >
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-01-15 20:48:27 +00:00
< / div >
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" > < a name = "otherops" > Other Operations< / a > < / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The instructions in this category are the "miscellaneous" instructions, which
defy better classification.< / p >
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< / div >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_icmp" > '< tt > icmp< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = icmp < cond> < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {i1} or {< N x i1> }:result< / i >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > icmp< / tt > ' instruction returns a boolean value or a vector of
boolean values based on comparison of its two integer, integer vector, or
pointer operands.< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > icmp< / tt > ' instruction takes three operands. The first operand is
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the condition code indicating the kind of comparison to perform. It is not a
value, just a keyword. The possible condition code are:< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< ol >
< li > < tt > eq< / tt > : equal< / li >
< li > < tt > ne< / tt > : not equal < / li >
< li > < tt > ugt< / tt > : unsigned greater than< / li >
< li > < tt > uge< / tt > : unsigned greater or equal< / li >
< li > < tt > ult< / tt > : unsigned less than< / li >
< li > < tt > ule< / tt > : unsigned less or equal< / li >
< li > < tt > sgt< / tt > : signed greater than< / li >
< li > < tt > sge< / tt > : signed greater or equal< / li >
< li > < tt > slt< / tt > : signed less than< / li >
< li > < tt > sle< / tt > : signed less or equal< / li >
< / ol >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-01-15 01:54:13 +00:00
< p > The remaining two arguments must be < a href = "#t_integer" > integer< / a > or
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > or integer < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a >
typed. They must also be identical types.< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > icmp< / tt > ' compares < tt > op1< / tt > and < tt > op2< / tt > according to the
condition code given as < tt > cond< / tt > . The comparison performed always yields
2009-09-27 00:45:11 +00:00
either an < a href = "#t_integer" > < tt > i1< / tt > < / a > or vector of < tt > i1< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
result, as follows:< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< ol >
< li > < tt > eq< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if the operands are equal,
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > false< / tt > otherwise. No sign interpretation is necessary or
performed.< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > ne< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if the operands are unequal,
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > false< / tt > otherwise. No sign interpretation is necessary or
performed.< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > ugt< / tt > : interprets the operands as unsigned values and yields
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > true< / tt > if < tt > op1< / tt > is greater than < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > uge< / tt > : interprets the operands as unsigned values and yields
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > true< / tt > if < tt > op1< / tt > is greater than or equal
to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > ult< / tt > : interprets the operands as unsigned values and yields
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > true< / tt > if < tt > op1< / tt > is less than < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > ule< / tt > : interprets the operands as unsigned values and yields
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > true< / tt > if < tt > op1< / tt > is less than or equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > sgt< / tt > : interprets the operands as signed values and yields
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > true< / tt > if < tt > op1< / tt > is greater than < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > sge< / tt > : interprets the operands as signed values and yields
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > true< / tt > if < tt > op1< / tt > is greater than or equal
to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > slt< / tt > : interprets the operands as signed values and yields
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > true< / tt > if < tt > op1< / tt > is less than < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > sle< / tt > : interprets the operands as signed values and yields
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > true< / tt > if < tt > op1< / tt > is less than or equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< / ol >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< p > If the operands are < a href = "#t_pointer" > pointer< / a > typed, the pointer
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
values are compared as if they were integers.< / p >
< p > If the operands are integer vectors, then they are compared element by
element. The result is an < tt > i1< / tt > vector with the same number of elements
as the values being compared. Otherwise, the result is an < tt > i1< / tt > .< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = icmp eq i32 4, 5 < i > ; yields: result=false< / i >
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
< result> = icmp ne float* %X, %X < i > ; yields: result=false< / i >
< result> = icmp ult i16 4, 5 < i > ; yields: result=true< / i >
< result> = icmp sgt i16 4, 5 < i > ; yields: result=false< / i >
< result> = icmp ule i16 -4, 5 < i > ; yields: result=false< / i >
< result> = icmp sge i16 4, 5 < i > ; yields: result=false< / i >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-01-22 01:39:38 +00:00
< p > Note that the code generator does not yet support vector types with
the < tt > icmp< / tt > instruction.< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" > < a name = "i_fcmp" > '< tt > fcmp< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = fcmp < cond> < ty> < op1> , < op2> < i > ; yields {i1} or {< N x i1> }:result< / i >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fcmp< / tt > ' instruction returns a boolean value or vector of boolean
values based on comparison of its operands.< / p >
< p > If the operands are floating point scalars, then the result type is a boolean
2009-09-27 00:45:11 +00:00
(< a href = "#t_integer" > < tt > i1< / tt > < / a > ).< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > If the operands are floating point vectors, then the result type is a vector
of boolean with the same number of elements as the operands being
compared.< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > fcmp< / tt > ' instruction takes three operands. The first operand is
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the condition code indicating the kind of comparison to perform. It is not a
value, just a keyword. The possible condition code are:< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< ol >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > false< / tt > : no comparison, always returns false< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > oeq< / tt > : ordered and equal< / li >
< li > < tt > ogt< / tt > : ordered and greater than < / li >
< li > < tt > oge< / tt > : ordered and greater than or equal< / li >
< li > < tt > olt< / tt > : ordered and less than < / li >
< li > < tt > ole< / tt > : ordered and less than or equal< / li >
< li > < tt > one< / tt > : ordered and not equal< / li >
< li > < tt > ord< / tt > : ordered (no nans)< / li >
< li > < tt > ueq< / tt > : unordered or equal< / li >
< li > < tt > ugt< / tt > : unordered or greater than < / li >
< li > < tt > uge< / tt > : unordered or greater than or equal< / li >
< li > < tt > ult< / tt > : unordered or less than < / li >
< li > < tt > ule< / tt > : unordered or less than or equal< / li >
< li > < tt > une< / tt > : unordered or not equal< / li >
< li > < tt > uno< / tt > : unordered (either nans)< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > true< / tt > : no comparison, always returns true< / li >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< / ol >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
< p > < i > Ordered< / i > means that neither operand is a QNAN while
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< i > unordered< / i > means that either operand may be a QNAN.< / p >
< p > Each of < tt > val1< / tt > and < tt > val2< / tt > arguments must be either
a < a href = "#t_floating" > floating point< / a > type or
a < a href = "#t_vector" > vector< / a > of floating point type. They must have
identical types.< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2008-08-07 21:46:00 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > fcmp< / tt > ' instruction compares < tt > op1< / tt > and < tt > op2< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
according to the condition code given as < tt > cond< / tt > . If the operands are
vectors, then the vectors are compared element by element. Each comparison
2009-09-27 00:45:11 +00:00
performed always yields an < a href = "#t_integer" > i1< / a > result, as
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
follows:< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< ol >
< li > < tt > false< / tt > : always yields < tt > false< / tt > , regardless of operands.< / li >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > oeq< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if both operands are not a QNAN and
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > ogt< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if both operands are not a QNAN and
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is greather than < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > oge< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if both operands are not a QNAN and
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is greater than or equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > olt< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if both operands are not a QNAN and
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is less than < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > ole< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if both operands are not a QNAN and
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is less than or equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > one< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if both operands are not a QNAN and
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is not equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > ord< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if both operands are not a QNAN.< / li >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > ueq< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if either operand is a QNAN or
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > ugt< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if either operand is a QNAN or
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is greater than < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > uge< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if either operand is a QNAN or
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is greater than or equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > ult< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if either operand is a QNAN or
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is less than < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > ule< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if either operand is a QNAN or
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is less than or equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > une< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if either operand is a QNAN or
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< tt > op1< / tt > is not equal to < tt > op2< / tt > .< / li >
2006-11-19 03:00:14 +00:00
< li > < tt > uno< / tt > : yields < tt > true< / tt > if either operand is a QNAN.< / li >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< li > < tt > true< / tt > : always yields < tt > true< / tt > , regardless of operands.< / li >
< / ol >
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = fcmp oeq float 4.0, 5.0 < i > ; yields: result=false< / i >
2008-09-09 01:02:47 +00:00
< result> = fcmp one float 4.0, 5.0 < i > ; yields: result=true< / i >
< result> = fcmp olt float 4.0, 5.0 < i > ; yields: result=true< / i >
< result> = fcmp ueq double 1.0, 2.0 < i > ; yields: result=false< / i >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-01-22 01:39:38 +00:00
< p > Note that the code generator does not yet support vector types with
the < tt > fcmp< / tt > instruction.< / p >
2006-11-18 21:50:54 +00:00
< / div >
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_phi" > '< tt > phi< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
< result> = phi < ty> [ < val0> , < label0> ], ...
< / pre >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > phi< / tt > ' instruction is used to implement the φ node in the
SSA graph representing the function.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The type of the incoming values is specified with the first type field. After
this, the '< tt > phi< / tt > ' instruction takes a list of pairs as arguments, with
one pair for each predecessor basic block of the current block. Only values
of < a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > type may be used as the value
arguments to the PHI node. Only labels may be used as the label
arguments.< / p >
< p > There must be no non-phi instructions between the start of a basic block and
the PHI instructions: i.e. PHI instructions must be first in a basic
block.< / p >
< p > For the purposes of the SSA form, the use of each incoming value is deemed to
occur on the edge from the corresponding predecessor block to the current
block (but after any definition of an '< tt > invoke< / tt > ' instruction's return
value on the same edge).< / p >
2009-06-03 10:20:10 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
< p > At runtime, the '< tt > phi< / tt > ' instruction logically takes on the value
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
specified by the pair corresponding to the predecessor basic block that
executed just prior to the current block.< / p >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2008-05-20 20:48:21 +00:00
< pre >
Loop: ; Infinite loop that counts from 0 on up...
%indvar = phi i32 [ 0, %LoopHeader ], [ %nextindvar, %Loop ]
%nextindvar = add i32 %indvar, 1
br label %Loop
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2006-11-08 01:18:52 +00:00
< / div >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< a name = "i_select" > '< tt > select< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2008-09-09 01:02:47 +00:00
< result> = select < i > selty< / i > < cond> , < ty> < val1> , < ty> < val2> < i > ; yields ty< / i >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< i > selty< / i > is either i1 or {< N x i1> }
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > select< / tt > ' instruction is used to choose one value based on a
condition, without branching.< / p >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
2006-04-08 23:07:04 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > select< / tt > ' instruction requires an 'i1' value or a vector of 'i1'
values indicating the condition, and two values of the
same < a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > type. If the val1/val2 are
vectors and the condition is a scalar, then entire vectors are selected, not
individual elements.< / p >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > If the condition is an i1 and it evaluates to 1, the instruction returns the
first value argument; otherwise, it returns the second value argument.< / p >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > If the condition is a vector of i1, then the value arguments must be vectors
of the same size, and the selection is done element by element.< / p >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-01-12 03:35:51 +00:00
%X = select i1 true, i8 17, i8 42 < i > ; yields i8:17< / i >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-01-22 01:39:38 +00:00
< p > Note that the code generator does not yet support conditions
with vector type.< / p >
2006-04-08 00:13:41 +00:00
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "i_call" > '< tt > call< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
< pre >
2008-10-07 17:48:33 +00:00
< result> = [tail] call [< a href = "#callingconv" > cconv< / a > ] [< a href = "#paramattrs" > ret attrs< / a > ] < ty> [< fnty> *] < fnptrval> (< function args> ) [< a href = "#fnattrs" > fn attrs< / a > ]
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
< / pre >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > call< / tt > ' instruction represents a simple function call.< / p >
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > This instruction requires several arguments:< / p >
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
2002-05-06 22:08:29 +00:00
< ol >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< li > The optional "tail" marker indicates whether the callee function accesses
any allocas or varargs in the caller. If the "tail" marker is present,
the function call is eligible for tail call optimization. Note that calls
may be marked "tail" even if they do not occur before
a < a href = "#i_ret" > < tt > ret< / tt > < / a > instruction.< / li >
2008-10-06 18:50:38 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< li > The optional "cconv" marker indicates which < a href = "#callingconv" > calling
convention< / a > the call should use. If none is specified, the call
defaults to using C calling conventions.< / li >
2008-10-06 18:50:38 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< li > The optional < a href = "#paramattrs" > Parameter Attributes< / a > list for
return values. Only '< tt > zeroext< / tt > ', '< tt > signext< / tt > ', and
'< tt > inreg< / tt > ' attributes are valid here.< / li >
< li > '< tt > ty< / tt > ': the type of the call instruction itself which is also the
type of the return value. Functions that return no value are marked
< tt > < a href = "#t_void" > void< / a > < / tt > .< / li >
< li > '< tt > fnty< / tt > ': shall be the signature of the pointer to function value
being invoked. The argument types must match the types implied by this
signature. This type can be omitted if the function is not varargs and if
the function type does not return a pointer to a function.< / li >
< li > '< tt > fnptrval< / tt > ': An LLVM value containing a pointer to a function to
be invoked. In most cases, this is a direct function invocation, but
indirect < tt > call< / tt > s are just as possible, calling an arbitrary pointer
to function value.< / li >
< li > '< tt > function args< / tt > ': argument list whose types match the function
signature argument types. All arguments must be of
< a href = "#t_firstclass" > first class< / a > type. If the function signature
indicates the function accepts a variable number of arguments, the extra
arguments can be specified.< / li >
< li > The optional < a href = "#fnattrs" > function attributes< / a > list. Only
'< tt > noreturn< / tt > ', '< tt > nounwind< / tt > ', '< tt > readonly< / tt > ' and
'< tt > readnone< / tt > ' attributes are valid here.< / li >
2002-05-06 22:08:29 +00:00
< / ol >
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > call< / tt > ' instruction is used to cause control flow to transfer to
a specified function, with its incoming arguments bound to the specified
values. Upon a '< tt > < a href = "#i_ret" > ret< / a > < / tt > ' instruction in the called
function, control flow continues with the instruction after the function
call, and the return value of the function is bound to the result
argument.< / p >
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
< pre >
2007-09-08 13:57:50 +00:00
%retval = call i32 @test(i32 %argc)
2008-03-21 17:24:17 +00:00
call i32 (i8 *, ...)* @printf(i8 * %msg, i32 12, i8 42) < i > ; yields i32< / i >
%X = tail call i32 @foo() < i > ; yields i32< / i >
%Y = tail call < a href = "#callingconv" > fastcc< / a > i32 @foo() < i > ; yields i32< / i >
call void %foo(i8 97 signext)
2008-03-10 20:49:15 +00:00
%struct.A = type { i32, i8 }
2008-10-06 18:50:38 +00:00
%r = call %struct.A @foo() < i > ; yields { 32, i8 }< / i >
2008-10-04 19:00:07 +00:00
%gr = extractvalue %struct.A %r, 0 < i > ; yields i32< / i >
%gr1 = extractvalue %struct.A %r, 1 < i > ; yields i8< / i >
2008-10-08 06:26:11 +00:00
%Z = call void @foo() noreturn < i > ; indicates that %foo never returns normally< / i >
2008-10-07 10:03:45 +00:00
%ZZ = call zeroext i32 @bar() < i > ; Return value is %zero extended< / i >
2005-05-06 05:47:36 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-09-24 18:38:21 +00:00
< p > llvm treats calls to some functions with names and arguments that match the
2009-09-25 17:04:42 +00:00
standard C99 library as being the C99 library functions, and may perform
optimizations or generate code for them under that assumption. This is
something we'd like to change in the future to provide better support for
freestanding environments and non-C-based langauges.< / p >
2009-09-24 18:38:21 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
2003-10-18 05:51:36 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-01-13 23:26:01 +00:00
< a name = "i_va_arg" > '< tt > va_arg< / tt > ' Instruction< / a >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
2003-10-18 05:51:36 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
< pre >
OK, after checking the backwards compatibility code on X86 and the new code
path on alpha, now has come the time for new vararg support. So, with out
further ado, I revert behavior back a couple of years!
Well, ok, I lied. A few more notes.
First, the Simple ISels cannot be expected to work any longer, but they
should still compile
Second, there are likely some bugs to track down once the nightly testers
start with this.
Third, the initial patch doesn't include sparcv9, but I'll do that today.
Forth, subsequent patches won't bother being long winded.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@22251 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2005-06-18 18:28:17 +00:00
< resultval> = va_arg < va_list*> < arglist> , < argty>
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
< / pre >
2003-10-18 05:51:36 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
OK, after checking the backwards compatibility code on X86 and the new code
path on alpha, now has come the time for new vararg support. So, with out
further ado, I revert behavior back a couple of years!
Well, ok, I lied. A few more notes.
First, the Simple ISels cannot be expected to work any longer, but they
should still compile
Second, there are likely some bugs to track down once the nightly testers
start with this.
Third, the initial patch doesn't include sparcv9, but I'll do that today.
Forth, subsequent patches won't bother being long winded.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@22251 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2005-06-18 18:28:17 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > va_arg< / tt > ' instruction is used to access arguments passed through
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the "variable argument" area of a function call. It is used to implement the
< tt > va_arg< / tt > macro in C.< / p >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
2003-10-18 05:51:36 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This instruction takes a < tt > va_list*< / tt > value and the type of the
argument. It returns a value of the specified argument type and increments
the < tt > va_list< / tt > to point to the next argument. The actual type
of < tt > va_list< / tt > is target specific.< / p >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
2003-10-18 05:51:36 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > va_arg< / tt > ' instruction loads an argument of the specified type
from the specified < tt > va_list< / tt > and causes the < tt > va_list< / tt > to point
to the next argument. For more information, see the variable argument
handling < a href = "#int_varargs" > Intrinsic Functions< / a > .< / p >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
< p > It is legal for this instruction to be called in a function which does not
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
take a variable number of arguments, for example, the < tt > vfprintf< / tt >
function.< / p >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > < tt > va_arg< / tt > is an LLVM instruction instead of
an < a href = "#intrinsics" > intrinsic function< / a > because it takes a type as an
argument.< / p >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
2003-10-18 05:51:36 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
2004-09-27 21:51:25 +00:00
< p > See the < a href = "#int_varargs" > variable argument processing< / a > section.< / p >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that the code generator does not yet fully support va_arg on many
targets. Also, it does not currently support va_arg with aggregate types on
any target.< / p >
2009-01-12 23:12:39 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2003-11-25 01:02:51 +00:00
< div class = "doc_section" > < a name = "intrinsics" > Intrinsic Functions< / a > < / div >
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< p > LLVM supports the notion of an "intrinsic function". These functions have
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
well known names and semantics and are required to follow certain
restrictions. Overall, these intrinsics represent an extension mechanism for
the LLVM language that does not require changing all of the transformations
in LLVM when adding to the language (or the bitcode reader/writer, the
parser, etc...).< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
2005-05-16 16:17:45 +00:00
< p > Intrinsic function names must all start with an "< tt > llvm.< / tt > " prefix. This
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
prefix is reserved in LLVM for intrinsic names; thus, function names may not
begin with this prefix. Intrinsic functions must always be external
functions: you cannot define the body of intrinsic functions. Intrinsic
functions may only be used in call or invoke instructions: it is illegal to
take the address of an intrinsic function. Additionally, because intrinsic
functions are part of the LLVM language, it is required if any are added that
they be documented here.< / p >
< p > Some intrinsic functions can be overloaded, i.e., the intrinsic represents a
family of functions that perform the same operation but on different data
types. Because LLVM can represent over 8 million different integer types,
overloading is used commonly to allow an intrinsic function to operate on any
integer type. One or more of the argument types or the result type can be
overloaded to accept any integer type. Argument types may also be defined as
exactly matching a previous argument's type or the result type. This allows
an intrinsic function which accepts multiple arguments, but needs all of them
to be of the same type, to only be overloaded with respect to a single
argument or the result.< / p >
< p > Overloaded intrinsics will have the names of its overloaded argument types
encoded into its function name, each preceded by a period. Only those types
which are overloaded result in a name suffix. Arguments whose type is matched
against another type do not. For example, the < tt > llvm.ctpop< / tt > function
can take an integer of any width and returns an integer of exactly the same
integer width. This leads to a family of functions such as
< tt > i8 @llvm.ctpop.i8(i8 %val)< / tt > and < tt > i29 @llvm.ctpop.i29(i29
%val)< / tt > . Only one type, the return type, is overloaded, and only one type
suffix is required. Because the argument's type is matched against the return
type, it does not require its own name suffix.< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
2007-04-01 08:04:23 +00:00
< p > To learn how to add an intrinsic function, please see the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< a href = "ExtendingLLVM.html" > Extending LLVM Guide< / a > .< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_varargs" > Variable Argument Handling Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Variable argument support is defined in LLVM with
the < a href = "#i_va_arg" > < tt > va_arg< / tt > < / a > instruction and these three
intrinsic functions. These functions are related to the similarly named
macros defined in the < tt > < stdarg.h> < / tt > header file.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > All of these functions operate on arguments that use a target-specific value
type "< tt > va_list< / tt > ". The LLVM assembly language reference manual does
not define what this type is, so all transformations should be prepared to
handle these functions regardless of the type used.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2006-05-15 17:26:46 +00:00
< p > This example shows how the < a href = "#i_va_arg" > < tt > va_arg< / tt > < / a >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
instruction and the variable argument handling intrinsic functions are
used.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< div class = "doc_code" >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< pre >
2007-03-21 23:58:04 +00:00
define i32 @test(i32 %X, ...) {
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
; Initialize variable argument processing
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
%ap = alloca i8*
2007-01-08 07:55:15 +00:00
%ap2 = bitcast i8** %ap to i8*
2007-03-21 23:58:04 +00:00
call void @llvm.va_start(i8* %ap2)
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
; Read a single integer argument
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
%tmp = va_arg i8** %ap, i32
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
; Demonstrate usage of llvm.va_copy and llvm.va_end
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
%aq = alloca i8*
2007-01-08 07:55:15 +00:00
%aq2 = bitcast i8** %aq to i8*
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
call void @llvm.va_copy(i8* %aq2, i8* %ap2)
2007-03-21 23:58:04 +00:00
call void @llvm.va_end(i8* %aq2)
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
; Stop processing of arguments.
2007-03-21 23:58:04 +00:00
call void @llvm.va_end(i8* %ap2)
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
ret i32 %tmp
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
}
2007-03-21 23:58:04 +00:00
declare void @llvm.va_start(i8*)
declare void @llvm.va_copy(i8*, i8*)
declare void @llvm.va_end(i8*)
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< / pre >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
2007-05-29 09:04:49 +00:00
< / div >
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_va_start" > '< tt > llvm.va_start< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
declare void %llvm.va_start(i8* < arglist> )
< / pre >
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.va_start< / tt > ' intrinsic initializes < tt > *< arglist> < / tt >
for subsequent use by < tt > < a href = "#i_va_arg" > va_arg< / a > < / tt > .< / p >
OK, after checking the backwards compatibility code on X86 and the new code
path on alpha, now has come the time for new vararg support. So, with out
further ado, I revert behavior back a couple of years!
Well, ok, I lied. A few more notes.
First, the Simple ISels cannot be expected to work any longer, but they
should still compile
Second, there are likely some bugs to track down once the nightly testers
start with this.
Third, the initial patch doesn't include sparcv9, but I'll do that today.
Forth, subsequent patches won't bother being long winded.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@22251 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2005-06-18 18:28:17 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< p > The argument is a pointer to a < tt > va_list< / tt > element to initialize.< / p >
OK, after checking the backwards compatibility code on X86 and the new code
path on alpha, now has come the time for new vararg support. So, with out
further ado, I revert behavior back a couple of years!
Well, ok, I lied. A few more notes.
First, the Simple ISels cannot be expected to work any longer, but they
should still compile
Second, there are likely some bugs to track down once the nightly testers
start with this.
Third, the initial patch doesn't include sparcv9, but I'll do that today.
Forth, subsequent patches won't bother being long winded.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@22251 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2005-06-18 18:28:17 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2008-10-14 16:51:45 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.va_start< / tt > ' intrinsic works just like the < tt > va_start< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
macro available in C. In a target-dependent way, it initializes
the < tt > va_list< / tt > element to which the argument points, so that the next
call to < tt > va_arg< / tt > will produce the first variable argument passed to
the function. Unlike the C < tt > va_start< / tt > macro, this intrinsic does not
need to know the last argument of the function as the compiler can figure
that out.< / p >
OK, after checking the backwards compatibility code on X86 and the new code
path on alpha, now has come the time for new vararg support. So, with out
further ado, I revert behavior back a couple of years!
Well, ok, I lied. A few more notes.
First, the Simple ISels cannot be expected to work any longer, but they
should still compile
Second, there are likely some bugs to track down once the nightly testers
start with this.
Third, the initial patch doesn't include sparcv9, but I'll do that today.
Forth, subsequent patches won't bother being long winded.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@22251 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2005-06-18 18:28:17 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_va_end" > '< tt > llvm.va_end< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
declare void @llvm.va_end(i8* < arglist> )
< / pre >
2007-01-08 07:55:15 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.va_end< / tt > ' intrinsic destroys < tt > *< arglist> < / tt > ,
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
which has been initialized previously
with < tt > < a href = "#int_va_start" > llvm.va_start< / a > < / tt >
or < tt > < a href = "#i_va_copy" > llvm.va_copy< / a > < / tt > .< / p >
2007-01-08 07:55:15 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
< p > The argument is a pointer to a < tt > va_list< / tt > to destroy.< / p >
2007-01-08 07:55:15 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.va_end< / tt > ' intrinsic works just like the < tt > va_end< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
macro available in C. In a target-dependent way, it destroys
the < tt > va_list< / tt > element to which the argument points. Calls
to < a href = "#int_va_start" > < tt > llvm.va_start< / tt > < / a >
and < a href = "#int_va_copy" > < tt > llvm.va_copy< / tt > < / a > must be matched exactly
with calls to < tt > llvm.va_end< / tt > .< / p >
2007-01-08 07:55:15 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_va_copy" > '< tt > llvm.va_copy< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
< / div >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< pre >
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare void @llvm.va_copy(i8* < destarglist> , i8* < srcarglist> )
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / pre >
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.va_copy< / tt > ' intrinsic copies the current argument position
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
from the source argument list to the destination argument list.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
OK, after checking the backwards compatibility code on X86 and the new code
path on alpha, now has come the time for new vararg support. So, with out
further ado, I revert behavior back a couple of years!
Well, ok, I lied. A few more notes.
First, the Simple ISels cannot be expected to work any longer, but they
should still compile
Second, there are likely some bugs to track down once the nightly testers
start with this.
Third, the initial patch doesn't include sparcv9, but I'll do that today.
Forth, subsequent patches won't bother being long winded.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@22251 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2005-06-18 18:28:17 +00:00
< p > The first argument is a pointer to a < tt > va_list< / tt > element to initialize.
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
The second argument is a pointer to a < tt > va_list< / tt > element to copy
from.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
2003-05-08 04:57:36 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2007-04-29 01:07:00 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.va_copy< / tt > ' intrinsic works just like the < tt > va_copy< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
macro available in C. In a target-dependent way, it copies the
source < tt > va_list< / tt > element into the destination < tt > va_list< / tt >
element. This intrinsic is necessary because
the < tt > < a href = "#int_va_start" > llvm.va_start< / a > < / tt > intrinsic may be
arbitrarily complex and require, for example, memory allocation.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_gc" > Accurate Garbage Collection Intrinsics< / a >
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / div >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM support for < a href = "GarbageCollection.html" > Accurate Garbage
2008-08-05 18:29:16 +00:00
Collection< / a > (GC) requires the implementation and generation of these
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
intrinsics. These intrinsics allow identification of < a href = "#int_gcroot" > GC
roots on the stack< / a > , as well as garbage collector implementations that
require < a href = "#int_gcread" > read< / a > and < a href = "#int_gcwrite" > write< / a >
barriers. Front-ends for type-safe garbage collected languages should generate
these intrinsics to make use of the LLVM garbage collectors. For more details,
see < a href = "GarbageCollection.html" > Accurate Garbage Collection with
LLVM< / a > .< / p >
2007-12-17 01:00:21 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The garbage collection intrinsics only operate on objects in the generic
address space (address space zero).< / p >
2007-12-17 01:00:21 +00:00
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_gcroot" > '< tt > llvm.gcroot< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-09-21 17:30:40 +00:00
declare void @llvm.gcroot(i8** %ptrloc, i8* %metadata)
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2004-12-10 15:51:16 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.gcroot< / tt > ' intrinsic declares the existence of a GC root to
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
the code generator, and allows some metadata to be associated with it.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The first argument specifies the address of a stack object that contains the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
root pointer. The second pointer (which must be either a constant or a
global value address) contains the meta-data to be associated with the
root.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2008-04-24 05:59:56 +00:00
< p > At runtime, a call to this intrinsic stores a null pointer into the "ptrloc"
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
location. At compile-time, the code generator generates information to allow
the runtime to find the pointer at GC safe points. The '< tt > llvm.gcroot< / tt > '
intrinsic may only be used in a function which < a href = "#gc" > specifies a GC
algorithm< / a > .< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_gcread" > '< tt > llvm.gcread< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-09-21 17:30:40 +00:00
declare i8* @llvm.gcread(i8* %ObjPtr, i8** %Ptr)
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.gcread< / tt > ' intrinsic identifies reads of references from heap
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
locations, allowing garbage collector implementations that require read
barriers.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2006-03-14 20:02:51 +00:00
< p > The second argument is the address to read from, which should be an address
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
allocated from the garbage collector. The first object is a pointer to the
start of the referenced object, if needed by the language runtime (otherwise
null).< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.gcread< / tt > ' intrinsic has the same semantics as a load
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
instruction, but may be replaced with substantially more complex code by the
garbage collector runtime, as needed. The '< tt > llvm.gcread< / tt > ' intrinsic
may only be used in a function which < a href = "#gc" > specifies a GC
algorithm< / a > .< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_gcwrite" > '< tt > llvm.gcwrite< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-09-21 17:30:40 +00:00
declare void @llvm.gcwrite(i8* %P1, i8* %Obj, i8** %P2)
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.gcwrite< / tt > ' intrinsic identifies writes of references to heap
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
locations, allowing garbage collector implementations that require write
barriers (such as generational or reference counting collectors).< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2006-03-14 20:02:51 +00:00
< p > The first argument is the reference to store, the second is the start of the
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
object to store it to, and the third is the address of the field of Obj to
store to. If the runtime does not require a pointer to the object, Obj may
be null.< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.gcwrite< / tt > ' intrinsic has the same semantics as a store
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
instruction, but may be replaced with substantially more complex code by the
garbage collector runtime, as needed. The '< tt > llvm.gcwrite< / tt > ' intrinsic
may only be used in a function which < a href = "#gc" > specifies a GC
algorithm< / a > .< / p >
2004-05-23 21:06:01 +00:00
< / div >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_codegen" > Code Generator Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These intrinsics are provided by LLVM to expose special features that may
only be implemented with code generator support.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_returnaddress" > '< tt > llvm.returnaddress< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare i8 *@llvm.returnaddress(i32 < level> )
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.returnaddress< / tt > ' intrinsic attempts to compute a
target-specific value indicating the return address of the current function
or one of its callers.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The argument to this intrinsic indicates which function to return the address
for. Zero indicates the calling function, one indicates its caller, etc.
The argument is < b > required< / b > to be a constant integer value.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.returnaddress< / tt > ' intrinsic either returns a pointer
indicating the return address of the specified call frame, or zero if it
cannot be identified. The value returned by this intrinsic is likely to be
incorrect or 0 for arguments other than zero, so it should only be used for
debugging purposes.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that calling this intrinsic does not prevent function inlining or other
aggressive transformations, so the value returned may not be that of the
obvious source-language caller.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_frameaddress" > '< tt > llvm.frameaddress< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-09-21 17:30:40 +00:00
declare i8 *@llvm.frameaddress(i32 < level> )
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.frameaddress< / tt > ' intrinsic attempts to return the
target-specific frame pointer value for the specified stack frame.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The argument to this intrinsic indicates which function to return the frame
pointer for. Zero indicates the calling function, one indicates its caller,
etc. The argument is < b > required< / b > to be a constant integer value.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.frameaddress< / tt > ' intrinsic either returns a pointer
indicating the frame address of the specified call frame, or zero if it
cannot be identified. The value returned by this intrinsic is likely to be
incorrect or 0 for arguments other than zero, so it should only be used for
debugging purposes.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that calling this intrinsic does not prevent function inlining or other
aggressive transformations, so the value returned may not be that of the
obvious source-language caller.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_stacksave" > '< tt > llvm.stacksave< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-09-21 17:30:40 +00:00
declare i8 *@llvm.stacksave()
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.stacksave< / tt > ' intrinsic is used to remember the current state
of the function stack, for use
with < a href = "#int_stackrestore" > < tt > llvm.stackrestore< / tt > < / a > . This is
useful for implementing language features like scoped automatic variable
sized arrays in C99.< / p >
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic returns a opaque pointer value that can be passed
to < a href = "#int_stackrestore" > < tt > llvm.stackrestore< / tt > < / a > . When
an < tt > llvm.stackrestore< / tt > intrinsic is executed with a value saved
from < tt > llvm.stacksave< / tt > , it effectively restores the state of the stack
to the state it was in when the < tt > llvm.stacksave< / tt > intrinsic executed.
In practice, this pops any < a href = "#i_alloca" > alloca< / a > blocks from the
stack that were allocated after the < tt > llvm.stacksave< / tt > was executed.< / p >
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_stackrestore" > '< tt > llvm.stackrestore< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare void @llvm.stackrestore(i8 * %ptr)
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.stackrestore< / tt > ' intrinsic is used to restore the state of
the function stack to the state it was in when the
corresponding < a href = "#int_stacksave" > < tt > llvm.stacksave< / tt > < / a > intrinsic
executed. This is useful for implementing language features like scoped
automatic variable sized arrays in C99.< / p >
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > See the description
for < a href = "#int_stacksave" > < tt > llvm.stacksave< / tt > < / a > .< / p >
2006-01-13 02:03:13 +00:00
< / div >
2005-02-28 19:24:19 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_prefetch" > '< tt > llvm.prefetch< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2005-02-28 19:24:19 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-09-21 17:30:40 +00:00
declare void @llvm.prefetch(i8* < address> , i32 < rw> , i32 < locality> )
2005-02-28 19:24:19 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.prefetch< / tt > ' intrinsic is a hint to the code generator to
insert a prefetch instruction if supported; otherwise, it is a noop.
Prefetches have no effect on the behavior of the program but can change its
performance characteristics.< / p >
2005-02-28 19:24:19 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > < tt > address< / tt > is the address to be prefetched, < tt > rw< / tt > is the
specifier determining if the fetch should be for a read (0) or write (1),
and < tt > locality< / tt > is a temporal locality specifier ranging from (0) - no
locality, to (3) - extremely local keep in cache. The < tt > rw< / tt >
and < tt > locality< / tt > arguments must be constant integers.< / p >
2005-02-28 19:24:19 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic does not modify the behavior of the program. In particular,
prefetches cannot trap and do not produce a value. On targets that support
this intrinsic, the prefetch can provide hints to the processor cache for
better performance.< / p >
2005-02-28 19:24:19 +00:00
< / div >
2005-03-28 20:05:49 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_pcmarker" > '< tt > llvm.pcmarker< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2005-03-28 20:05:49 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-09-21 17:30:40 +00:00
declare void @llvm.pcmarker(i32 < id> )
2005-03-28 20:05:49 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.pcmarker< / tt > ' intrinsic is a method to export a Program
Counter (PC) in a region of code to simulators and other tools. The method
is target specific, but it is expected that the marker will use exported
symbols to transmit the PC of the marker. The marker makes no guarantees
that it will remain with any specific instruction after optimizations. It is
possible that the presence of a marker will inhibit optimizations. The
intended use is to be inserted after optimizations to allow correlations of
simulation runs.< / p >
2005-03-28 20:05:49 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > < tt > id< / tt > is a numerical id identifying the marker.< / p >
2005-03-28 20:05:49 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic does not modify the behavior of the program. Backends that do
not support this intrinisic may ignore it.< / p >
2005-03-28 20:05:49 +00:00
< / div >
2005-11-11 16:47:30 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_readcyclecounter" > '< tt > llvm.readcyclecounter< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2005-11-11 16:47:30 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare i64 @llvm.readcyclecounter( )
2005-11-11 16:47:30 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.readcyclecounter< / tt > ' intrinsic provides access to the cycle
counter register (or similar low latency, high accuracy clocks) on those
targets that support it. On X86, it should map to RDTSC. On Alpha, it
should map to RPCC. As the backing counters overflow quickly (on the order
of 9 seconds on alpha), this should only be used for small timings.< / p >
2005-11-11 16:47:30 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > When directly supported, reading the cycle counter should not modify any
memory. Implementations are allowed to either return a application specific
value or a system wide value. On backends without support, this is lowered
to a constant 0.< / p >
2005-11-11 16:47:30 +00:00
< / div >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_libc" > Standard C Library Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM provides intrinsics for a few important standard C library functions.
These intrinsics allow source-language front-ends to pass information about
the alignment of the pointer arguments to the code generator, providing
opportunity for more efficient code generation.< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_memcpy" > '< tt > llvm.memcpy< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.memcpy< / tt > on any
integer bit width. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< pre >
2008-11-21 16:42:48 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memcpy.i8(i8 * < dest> , i8 * < src> ,
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
i8 < len> , i32 < align> )
2008-11-21 16:42:48 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memcpy.i16(i8 * < dest> , i8 * < src> ,
i16 < len> , i32 < align> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memcpy.i32(i8 * < dest> , i8 * < src> ,
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
i32 < len> , i32 < align> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memcpy.i64(i8 * < dest> , i8 * < src> ,
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
i64 < len> , i32 < align> )
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.memcpy.*< / tt > ' intrinsics copy a block of memory from the
source location to the destination location.< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that, unlike the standard libc function, the < tt > llvm.memcpy.*< / tt >
intrinsics do not return a value, and takes an extra alignment argument.< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first argument is a pointer to the destination, the second is a pointer
to the source. The third argument is an integer argument specifying the
number of bytes to copy, and the fourth argument is the alignment of the
source and destination locations.< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > If the call to this intrinisic has an alignment value that is not 0 or 1,
then the caller guarantees that both the source and destination pointers are
aligned to that boundary.< / p >
2004-02-12 21:18:15 +00:00
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.memcpy.*< / tt > ' intrinsics copy a block of memory from the
source location to the destination location, which are not allowed to
overlap. It copies "len" bytes of memory over. If the argument is known to
be aligned to some boundary, this can be specified as the fourth argument,
otherwise it should be set to 0 or 1.< / p >
2004-02-12 17:01:32 +00:00
< / div >
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_memmove" > '< tt > llvm.memmove< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-11-21 16:42:48 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use llvm.memmove on any integer bit
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
width. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
< pre >
2008-11-21 16:42:48 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memmove.i8(i8 * < dest> , i8 * < src> ,
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
i8 < len> , i32 < align> )
2008-11-21 16:42:48 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memmove.i16(i8 * < dest> , i8 * < src> ,
i16 < len> , i32 < align> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memmove.i32(i8 * < dest> , i8 * < src> ,
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
i32 < len> , i32 < align> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memmove.i64(i8 * < dest> , i8 * < src> ,
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
i64 < len> , i32 < align> )
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.memmove.*< / tt > ' intrinsics move a block of memory from the
source location to the destination location. It is similar to the
'< tt > llvm.memcpy< / tt > ' intrinsic but allows the two memory locations to
overlap.< / p >
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that, unlike the standard libc function, the < tt > llvm.memmove.*< / tt >
intrinsics do not return a value, and takes an extra alignment argument.< / p >
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first argument is a pointer to the destination, the second is a pointer
to the source. The third argument is an integer argument specifying the
number of bytes to copy, and the fourth argument is the alignment of the
source and destination locations.< / p >
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > If the call to this intrinisic has an alignment value that is not 0 or 1,
then the caller guarantees that the source and destination pointers are
aligned to that boundary.< / p >
2004-02-12 21:18:15 +00:00
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.memmove.*< / tt > ' intrinsics copy a block of memory from the
source location to the destination location, which may overlap. It copies
"len" bytes of memory over. If the argument is known to be aligned to some
boundary, this can be specified as the fourth argument, otherwise it should
be set to 0 or 1.< / p >
2004-02-12 18:10:10 +00:00
< / div >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_memset" > '< tt > llvm.memset.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2008-11-21 16:42:48 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use llvm.memset on any integer bit
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
width. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< pre >
2008-11-21 16:42:48 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memset.i8(i8 * < dest> , i8 < val> ,
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
i8 < len> , i32 < align> )
2008-11-21 16:42:48 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memset.i16(i8 * < dest> , i8 < val> ,
i16 < len> , i32 < align> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memset.i32(i8 * < dest> , i8 < val> ,
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
i32 < len> , i32 < align> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memset.i64(i8 * < dest> , i8 < val> ,
2006-12-31 07:07:53 +00:00
i64 < len> , i32 < align> )
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.memset.*< / tt > ' intrinsics fill a block of memory with a
particular byte value.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > Note that, unlike the standard libc function, the < tt > llvm.memset< / tt >
intrinsic does not return a value, and takes an extra alignment argument.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first argument is a pointer to the destination to fill, the second is the
byte value to fill it with, the third argument is an integer argument
specifying the number of bytes to fill, and the fourth argument is the known
alignment of destination location.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > If the call to this intrinisic has an alignment value that is not 0 or 1,
then the caller guarantees that the destination pointer is aligned to that
boundary.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.memset.*< / tt > ' intrinsics fill "len" bytes of memory starting
at the destination location. If the argument is known to be aligned to some
boundary, this can be specified as the fourth argument, otherwise it should
be set to 0 or 1.< / p >
2004-02-14 04:08:35 +00:00
< / div >
2005-07-21 01:29:16 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_sqrt" > '< tt > llvm.sqrt.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2005-07-21 01:29:16 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.sqrt< / tt > on any
floating point or vector of floating point type. Not all targets support all
types however.< / p >
2005-07-21 01:29:16 +00:00
< pre >
2007-10-02 17:47:38 +00:00
declare float @llvm.sqrt.f32(float %Val)
declare double @llvm.sqrt.f64(double %Val)
declare x86_fp80 @llvm.sqrt.f80(x86_fp80 %Val)
declare fp128 @llvm.sqrt.f128(fp128 %Val)
declare ppc_fp128 @llvm.sqrt.ppcf128(ppc_fp128 %Val)
2005-07-21 01:29:16 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.sqrt< / tt > ' intrinsics return the sqrt of the specified operand,
returning the same value as the libm '< tt > sqrt< / tt > ' functions would.
Unlike < tt > sqrt< / tt > in libm, however, < tt > llvm.sqrt< / tt > has undefined
behavior for negative numbers other than -0.0 (which allows for better
optimization, because there is no need to worry about errno being
set). < tt > llvm.sqrt(-0.0)< / tt > is defined to return -0.0 like IEEE sqrt.< / p >
2005-07-21 01:29:16 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The argument and return value are floating point numbers of the same
type.< / p >
2005-07-21 01:29:16 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This function returns the sqrt of the specified operand if it is a
nonnegative floating point number.< / p >
2005-07-21 01:29:16 +00:00
< / div >
2006-09-08 06:34:02 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_powi" > '< tt > llvm.powi.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2006-09-08 06:34:02 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.powi< / tt > on any
floating point or vector of floating point type. Not all targets support all
types however.< / p >
2006-09-08 06:34:02 +00:00
< pre >
2007-10-02 17:47:38 +00:00
declare float @llvm.powi.f32(float %Val, i32 %power)
declare double @llvm.powi.f64(double %Val, i32 %power)
declare x86_fp80 @llvm.powi.f80(x86_fp80 %Val, i32 %power)
declare fp128 @llvm.powi.f128(fp128 %Val, i32 %power)
declare ppc_fp128 @llvm.powi.ppcf128(ppc_fp128 %Val, i32 %power)
2006-09-08 06:34:02 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.powi.*< / tt > ' intrinsics return the first operand raised to the
specified (positive or negative) power. The order of evaluation of
multiplications is not defined. When a vector of floating point type is
used, the second argument remains a scalar integer value.< / p >
2006-09-08 06:34:02 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The second argument is an integer power, and the first is a value to raise to
that power.< / p >
2006-09-08 06:34:02 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This function returns the first value raised to the second power with an
unspecified sequence of rounding operations.< / p >
2006-09-08 06:34:02 +00:00
< / div >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_sin" > '< tt > llvm.sin.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.sin< / tt > on any
floating point or vector of floating point type. Not all targets support all
types however.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< pre >
declare float @llvm.sin.f32(float %Val)
declare double @llvm.sin.f64(double %Val)
declare x86_fp80 @llvm.sin.f80(x86_fp80 %Val)
declare fp128 @llvm.sin.f128(fp128 %Val)
declare ppc_fp128 @llvm.sin.ppcf128(ppc_fp128 %Val)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.sin.*< / tt > ' intrinsics return the sine of the operand.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The argument and return value are floating point numbers of the same
type.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This function returns the sine of the specified operand, returning the same
values as the libm < tt > sin< / tt > functions would, and handles error conditions
in the same way.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_cos" > '< tt > llvm.cos.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.cos< / tt > on any
floating point or vector of floating point type. Not all targets support all
types however.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< pre >
declare float @llvm.cos.f32(float %Val)
declare double @llvm.cos.f64(double %Val)
declare x86_fp80 @llvm.cos.f80(x86_fp80 %Val)
declare fp128 @llvm.cos.f128(fp128 %Val)
declare ppc_fp128 @llvm.cos.ppcf128(ppc_fp128 %Val)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.cos.*< / tt > ' intrinsics return the cosine of the operand.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The argument and return value are floating point numbers of the same
type.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This function returns the cosine of the specified operand, returning the same
values as the libm < tt > cos< / tt > functions would, and handles error conditions
in the same way.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_pow" > '< tt > llvm.pow.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.pow< / tt > on any
floating point or vector of floating point type. Not all targets support all
types however.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< pre >
declare float @llvm.pow.f32(float %Val, float %Power)
declare double @llvm.pow.f64(double %Val, double %Power)
declare x86_fp80 @llvm.pow.f80(x86_fp80 %Val, x86_fp80 %Power)
declare fp128 @llvm.pow.f128(fp128 %Val, fp128 %Power)
declare ppc_fp128 @llvm.pow.ppcf128(ppc_fp128 %Val, ppc_fp128 Power)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.pow.*< / tt > ' intrinsics return the first operand raised to the
specified (positive or negative) power.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The second argument is a floating point power, and the first is a value to
raise to that power.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This function returns the first value raised to the second power, returning
the same values as the libm < tt > pow< / tt > functions would, and handles error
conditions in the same way.< / p >
2007-10-15 20:30:11 +00:00
< / div >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2006-01-13 23:26:38 +00:00
< a name = "int_manip" > Bit Manipulation Intrinsics< / a >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM provides intrinsics for a few important bit manipulation operations.
These allow efficient code generation for some algorithms.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / div >
2006-01-13 23:26:38 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-04-04 02:42:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_bswap" > '< tt > llvm.bswap.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a >
2006-01-13 23:26:38 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2007-04-01 08:04:23 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic function. You can use bswap on any integer
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
type that is an even number of bytes (i.e. BitWidth % 16 == 0).< / p >
2006-01-13 23:26:38 +00:00
< pre >
2007-08-04 01:51:18 +00:00
declare i16 @llvm.bswap.i16(i16 < id> )
declare i32 @llvm.bswap.i32(i32 < id> )
declare i64 @llvm.bswap.i64(i64 < id> )
2006-01-13 23:26:38 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.bswap< / tt > ' family of intrinsics is used to byte swap integer
values with an even number of bytes (positive multiple of 16 bits). These
are useful for performing operations on data that is not in the target's
native byte order.< / p >
2006-01-13 23:26:38 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < tt > llvm.bswap.i16< / tt > intrinsic returns an i16 value that has the high
and low byte of the input i16 swapped. Similarly,
the < tt > llvm.bswap.i32< / tt > intrinsic returns an i32 value that has the four
bytes of the input i32 swapped, so that if the input bytes are numbered 0, 1,
2, 3 then the returned i32 will have its bytes in 3, 2, 1, 0 order.
The < tt > llvm.bswap.i48< / tt > , < tt > llvm.bswap.i64< / tt > and other intrinsics
extend this concept to additional even-byte lengths (6 bytes, 8 bytes and
more, respectively).< / p >
2006-01-13 23:26:38 +00:00
< / div >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
For PR411:
This patch is an incremental step towards supporting a flat symbol table.
It de-overloads the intrinsic functions by providing type-specific intrinsics
and arranging for automatically upgrading from the old overloaded name to
the new non-overloaded name. Specifically:
llvm.isunordered -> llvm.isunordered.f32, llvm.isunordered.f64
llvm.sqrt -> llvm.sqrt.f32, llvm.sqrt.f64
llvm.ctpop -> llvm.ctpop.i8, llvm.ctpop.i16, llvm.ctpop.i32, llvm.ctpop.i64
llvm.ctlz -> llvm.ctlz.i8, llvm.ctlz.i16, llvm.ctlz.i32, llvm.ctlz.i64
llvm.cttz -> llvm.cttz.i8, llvm.cttz.i16, llvm.cttz.i32, llvm.cttz.i64
New code should not use the overloaded intrinsic names. Warnings will be
emitted if they are used.
git-svn-id: https://llvm.org/svn/llvm-project/llvm/trunk@25366 91177308-0d34-0410-b5e6-96231b3b80d8
2006-01-16 21:12:35 +00:00
< a name = "int_ctpop" > '< tt > llvm.ctpop.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2007-04-01 08:04:23 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use llvm.ctpop on any integer bit
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
width. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< pre >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.ctpop.i8(i8 < src> )
2007-08-04 01:51:18 +00:00
declare i16 @llvm.ctpop.i16(i16 < src> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare i32 @llvm.ctpop.i32(i32 < src> )
2007-08-04 01:51:18 +00:00
declare i64 @llvm.ctpop.i64(i64 < src> )
declare i256 @llvm.ctpop.i256(i256 < src> )
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.ctpop< / tt > ' family of intrinsics counts the number of bits set
in a value.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The only argument is the value to be counted. The argument may be of any
integer type. The return type must match the argument type.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.ctpop< / tt > ' intrinsic counts the 1's in a variable.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-01-16 22:34:14 +00:00
< a name = "int_ctlz" > '< tt > llvm.ctlz.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.ctlz< / tt > on any
integer bit width. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< pre >
2007-08-04 01:51:18 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.ctlz.i8 (i8 < src> )
declare i16 @llvm.ctlz.i16(i16 < src> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare i32 @llvm.ctlz.i32(i32 < src> )
2007-08-04 01:51:18 +00:00
declare i64 @llvm.ctlz.i64(i64 < src> )
declare i256 @llvm.ctlz.i256(i256 < src> )
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.ctlz< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions counts the number of
leading zeros in a variable.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The only argument is the value to be counted. The argument may be of any
integer type. The return type must match the argument type.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.ctlz< / tt > ' intrinsic counts the leading (most significant)
zeros in a variable. If the src == 0 then the result is the size in bits of
the type of src. For example, < tt > llvm.ctlz(i32 2) = 30< / tt > .< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2006-01-16 22:34:14 +00:00
< a name = "int_cttz" > '< tt > llvm.cttz.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.cttz< / tt > on any
integer bit width. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< pre >
2007-08-04 01:51:18 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.cttz.i8 (i8 < src> )
declare i16 @llvm.cttz.i16(i16 < src> )
2007-03-22 00:02:17 +00:00
declare i32 @llvm.cttz.i32(i32 < src> )
2007-08-04 01:51:18 +00:00
declare i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 < src> )
declare i256 @llvm.cttz.i256(i256 < src> )
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.cttz< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions counts the number of
trailing zeros.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The only argument is the value to be counted. The argument may be of any
integer type. The return type must match the argument type.< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.cttz< / tt > ' intrinsic counts the trailing (least significant)
zeros in a variable. If the src == 0 then the result is the size in bits of
the type of src. For example, < tt > llvm.cttz(2) = 1< / tt > .< / p >
2005-05-03 18:01:48 +00:00
< / div >
2004-06-11 02:28:03 +00:00
2009-02-08 04:04:40 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_overflow" > Arithmetic with Overflow Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > LLVM provides intrinsics for some arithmetic with overflow operations.< / p >
2009-02-08 04:04:40 +00:00
< / div >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2009-02-08 04:04:40 +00:00
< a name = "int_sadd_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.sadd.with.overflow.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.sadd.with.overflow< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
on any integer bit width.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< pre >
declare {i16, i1} @llvm.sadd.with.overflow.i16(i16 %a, i16 %b)
declare {i32, i1} @llvm.sadd.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
declare {i64, i1} @llvm.sadd.with.overflow.i64(i64 %a, i64 %b)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.sadd.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
a signed addition of the two arguments, and indicate whether an overflow
occurred during the signed summation.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The arguments (%a and %b) and the first element of the result structure may
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
be of integer types of any bit width, but they must have the same bit
width. The second element of the result structure must be of
type < tt > i1< / tt > . < tt > %a< / tt > and < tt > %b< / tt > are the two values that will
undergo signed addition.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.sadd.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
a signed addition of the two variables. They return a structure — the
first element of which is the signed summation, and the second element of
which is a bit specifying if the signed summation resulted in an
overflow.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
%res = call {i32, i1} @llvm.sadd.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
%sum = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 0
%obit = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 1
br i1 %obit, label %overflow, label %normal
< / pre >
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2009-02-08 04:04:40 +00:00
< a name = "int_uadd_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.uadd.with.overflow.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.uadd.with.overflow< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
on any integer bit width.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< pre >
declare {i16, i1} @llvm.uadd.with.overflow.i16(i16 %a, i16 %b)
declare {i32, i1} @llvm.uadd.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
declare {i64, i1} @llvm.uadd.with.overflow.i64(i64 %a, i64 %b)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.uadd.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
an unsigned addition of the two arguments, and indicate whether a carry
occurred during the unsigned summation.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The arguments (%a and %b) and the first element of the result structure may
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
be of integer types of any bit width, but they must have the same bit
width. The second element of the result structure must be of
type < tt > i1< / tt > . < tt > %a< / tt > and < tt > %b< / tt > are the two values that will
undergo unsigned addition.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.uadd.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
an unsigned addition of the two arguments. They return a structure —
the first element of which is the sum, and the second element of which is a
bit specifying if the unsigned summation resulted in a carry.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
%res = call {i32, i1} @llvm.uadd.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
%sum = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 0
%obit = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 1
br i1 %obit, label %carry, label %normal
< / pre >
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2009-02-08 04:04:40 +00:00
< a name = "int_ssub_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.ssub.with.overflow.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.ssub.with.overflow< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
on any integer bit width.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< pre >
declare {i16, i1} @llvm.ssub.with.overflow.i16(i16 %a, i16 %b)
declare {i32, i1} @llvm.ssub.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
declare {i64, i1} @llvm.ssub.with.overflow.i64(i64 %a, i64 %b)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.ssub.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
a signed subtraction of the two arguments, and indicate whether an overflow
occurred during the signed subtraction.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The arguments (%a and %b) and the first element of the result structure may
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
be of integer types of any bit width, but they must have the same bit
width. The second element of the result structure must be of
type < tt > i1< / tt > . < tt > %a< / tt > and < tt > %b< / tt > are the two values that will
undergo signed subtraction.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.ssub.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
a signed subtraction of the two arguments. They return a structure —
the first element of which is the subtraction, and the second element of
which is a bit specifying if the signed subtraction resulted in an
overflow.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
%res = call {i32, i1} @llvm.ssub.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
%sum = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 0
%obit = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 1
br i1 %obit, label %overflow, label %normal
< / pre >
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2009-02-08 04:04:40 +00:00
< a name = "int_usub_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.usub.with.overflow.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.usub.with.overflow< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
on any integer bit width.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< pre >
declare {i16, i1} @llvm.usub.with.overflow.i16(i16 %a, i16 %b)
declare {i32, i1} @llvm.usub.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
declare {i64, i1} @llvm.usub.with.overflow.i64(i64 %a, i64 %b)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.usub.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
an unsigned subtraction of the two arguments, and indicate whether an
overflow occurred during the unsigned subtraction.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The arguments (%a and %b) and the first element of the result structure may
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
be of integer types of any bit width, but they must have the same bit
width. The second element of the result structure must be of
type < tt > i1< / tt > . < tt > %a< / tt > and < tt > %b< / tt > are the two values that will
undergo unsigned subtraction.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.usub.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
an unsigned subtraction of the two arguments. They return a structure —
the first element of which is the subtraction, and the second element of
which is a bit specifying if the unsigned subtraction resulted in an
overflow.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
%res = call {i32, i1} @llvm.usub.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
%sum = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 0
%obit = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 1
br i1 %obit, label %overflow, label %normal
< / pre >
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2009-02-08 04:04:40 +00:00
< a name = "int_smul_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.smul.with.overflow.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.smul.with.overflow< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
on any integer bit width.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< pre >
declare {i16, i1} @llvm.smul.with.overflow.i16(i16 %a, i16 %b)
declare {i32, i1} @llvm.smul.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
declare {i64, i1} @llvm.smul.with.overflow.i64(i64 %a, i64 %b)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.smul.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
a signed multiplication of the two arguments, and indicate whether an
overflow occurred during the signed multiplication.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The arguments (%a and %b) and the first element of the result structure may
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
be of integer types of any bit width, but they must have the same bit
width. The second element of the result structure must be of
type < tt > i1< / tt > . < tt > %a< / tt > and < tt > %b< / tt > are the two values that will
undergo signed multiplication.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.smul.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
a signed multiplication of the two arguments. They return a structure —
the first element of which is the multiplication, and the second element of
which is a bit specifying if the signed multiplication resulted in an
overflow.< / p >
2009-02-08 01:40:31 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
%res = call {i32, i1} @llvm.smul.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
%sum = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 0
%obit = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 1
br i1 %obit, label %overflow, label %normal
< / pre >
2007-04-11 23:23:49 +00:00
< / div >
2009-02-08 23:00:09 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_umul_overflow" > '< tt > llvm.umul.with.overflow.*< / tt > ' Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.umul.with.overflow< / tt >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
on any integer bit width.< / p >
2009-02-08 23:00:09 +00:00
< pre >
declare {i16, i1} @llvm.umul.with.overflow.i16(i16 %a, i16 %b)
declare {i32, i1} @llvm.umul.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
declare {i64, i1} @llvm.umul.with.overflow.i64(i64 %a, i64 %b)
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.umul.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
a unsigned multiplication of the two arguments, and indicate whether an
overflow occurred during the unsigned multiplication.< / p >
2009-02-08 23:00:09 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The arguments (%a and %b) and the first element of the result structure may
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
be of integer types of any bit width, but they must have the same bit
width. The second element of the result structure must be of
type < tt > i1< / tt > . < tt > %a< / tt > and < tt > %b< / tt > are the two values that will
undergo unsigned multiplication.< / p >
2009-02-08 23:00:09 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.umul.with.overflow< / tt > ' family of intrinsic functions perform
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
an unsigned multiplication of the two arguments. They return a structure
— the first element of which is the multiplication, and the second
element of which is a bit specifying if the unsigned multiplication resulted
in an overflow.< / p >
2009-02-08 23:00:09 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
%res = call {i32, i1} @llvm.umul.with.overflow.i32(i32 %a, i32 %b)
%sum = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 0
%obit = extractvalue {i32, i1} %res, 1
br i1 %obit, label %overflow, label %normal
< / pre >
< / div >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_debugger" > Debugger Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The LLVM debugger intrinsics (which all start with < tt > llvm.dbg.< / tt >
prefix), are described in
the < a href = "SourceLevelDebugging.html#format_common_intrinsics" > LLVM Source
Level Debugging< / a > document.< / p >
< / div >
2004-01-06 05:31:32 +00:00
2007-03-14 19:31:19 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_eh" > Exception Handling Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The LLVM exception handling intrinsics (which all start with
< tt > llvm.eh.< / tt > prefix), are described in
the < a href = "ExceptionHandling.html#format_common_intrinsics" > LLVM Exception
Handling< / a > document.< / p >
2007-03-14 19:31:19 +00:00
< / div >
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
2007-09-11 14:10:23 +00:00
< a name = "int_trampoline" > Trampoline Intrinsic< / a >
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic makes it possible to excise one parameter, marked with
the < tt > nest< / tt > attribute, from a function. The result is a callable
function pointer lacking the nest parameter - the caller does not need to
provide a value for it. Instead, the value to use is stored in advance in a
"trampoline", a block of memory usually allocated on the stack, which also
contains code to splice the nest value into the argument list. This is used
to implement the GCC nested function address extension.< / p >
< p > For example, if the function is
< tt > i32 f(i8* nest %c, i32 %x, i32 %y)< / tt > then the resulting function
pointer has signature < tt > i32 (i32, i32)*< / tt > . It can be created as
follows:< / p >
< div class = "doc_code" >
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< pre >
2007-09-11 14:10:23 +00:00
%tramp = alloca [10 x i8], align 4 ; size and alignment only correct for X86
%tramp1 = getelementptr [10 x i8]* %tramp, i32 0, i32 0
%p = call i8* @llvm.init.trampoline( i8* %tramp1, i8* bitcast (i32 (i8* nest , i32, i32)* @f to i8*), i8* %nval )
%fp = bitcast i8* %p to i32 (i32, i32)*
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / div >
< p > The call < tt > %val = call i32 %fp( i32 %x, i32 %y )< / tt > is then equivalent
to < tt > %val = call i32 %f( i8* %nval, i32 %x, i32 %y )< / tt > .< / p >
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_it" > '< tt > llvm.init.trampoline< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare i8* @llvm.init.trampoline(i8* < tramp> , i8* < func> , i8* < nval> )
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This fills the memory pointed to by < tt > tramp< / tt > with code and returns a
function pointer suitable for executing it.< / p >
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < tt > llvm.init.trampoline< / tt > intrinsic takes three arguments, all
pointers. The < tt > tramp< / tt > argument must point to a sufficiently large and
sufficiently aligned block of memory; this memory is written to by the
intrinsic. Note that the size and the alignment are target-specific - LLVM
currently provides no portable way of determining them, so a front-end that
generates this intrinsic needs to have some target-specific knowledge.
The < tt > func< / tt > argument must hold a function bitcast to
an < tt > i8*< / tt > .< / p >
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The block of memory pointed to by < tt > tramp< / tt > is filled with target
dependent code, turning it into a function. A pointer to this function is
returned, but needs to be bitcast to an < a href = "#int_trampoline" > appropriate
function pointer type< / a > before being called. The new function's signature
is the same as that of < tt > func< / tt > with any arguments marked with
the < tt > nest< / tt > attribute removed. At most one such < tt > nest< / tt > argument
is allowed, and it must be of pointer type. Calling the new function is
equivalent to calling < tt > func< / tt > with the same argument list, but
with < tt > nval< / tt > used for the missing < tt > nest< / tt > argument. If, after
calling < tt > llvm.init.trampoline< / tt > , the memory pointed to
by < tt > tramp< / tt > is modified, then the effect of any later call to the
returned function pointer is undefined.< / p >
2007-07-27 12:58:54 +00:00
< / div >
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_atomics" > Atomic Operations and Synchronization Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These intrinsic functions expand the "universal IR" of LLVM to represent
hardware constructs for atomic operations and memory synchronization. This
provides an interface to the hardware, not an interface to the programmer. It
is aimed at a low enough level to allow any programming models or APIs
(Application Programming Interfaces) which need atomic behaviors to map
cleanly onto it. It is also modeled primarily on hardware behavior. Just as
hardware provides a "universal IR" for source languages, it also provides a
starting point for developing a "universal" atomic operation and
synchronization IR.< / p >
< p > These do < em > not< / em > form an API such as high-level threading libraries,
software transaction memory systems, atomic primitives, and intrinsic
functions as found in BSD, GNU libc, atomic_ops, APR, and other system and
application libraries. The hardware interface provided by LLVM should allow
a clean implementation of all of these APIs and parallel programming models.
No one model or paradigm should be selected above others unless the hardware
itself ubiquitously does so.< / p >
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_memory_barrier" > '< tt > llvm.memory.barrier< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare void @llvm.memory.barrier( i1 < ll> , i1 < ls> , i1 < sl> , i1 < ss> , i1 < device> )
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < tt > llvm.memory.barrier< / tt > intrinsic guarantees ordering between
specific pairs of memory access types.< / p >
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < tt > llvm.memory.barrier< / tt > intrinsic requires five boolean arguments.
The first four arguments enables a specific barrier as listed below. The
fith argument specifies that the barrier applies to io or device or uncached
memory.< / p >
< ul >
< li > < tt > ll< / tt > : load-load barrier< / li >
< li > < tt > ls< / tt > : load-store barrier< / li >
< li > < tt > sl< / tt > : store-load barrier< / li >
< li > < tt > ss< / tt > : store-store barrier< / li >
< li > < tt > device< / tt > : barrier applies to device and uncached memory also.< / li >
< / ul >
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic causes the system to enforce some ordering constraints upon
the loads and stores of the program. This barrier does not
indicate < em > when< / em > any events will occur, it only enforces
an < em > order< / em > in which they occur. For any of the specified pairs of load
and store operations (f.ex. load-load, or store-load), all of the first
operations preceding the barrier will complete before any of the second
operations succeeding the barrier begin. Specifically the semantics for each
pairing is as follows:< / p >
< ul >
< li > < tt > ll< / tt > : All loads before the barrier must complete before any load
after the barrier begins.< / li >
< li > < tt > ls< / tt > : All loads before the barrier must complete before any
store after the barrier begins.< / li >
< li > < tt > ss< / tt > : All stores before the barrier must complete before any
store after the barrier begins.< / li >
< li > < tt > sl< / tt > : All stores before the barrier must complete before any
load after the barrier begins.< / li >
< / ul >
< p > These semantics are applied with a logical "and" behavior when more than one
is enabled in a single memory barrier intrinsic.< / p >
< p > Backends may implement stronger barriers than those requested when they do
not support as fine grained a barrier as requested. Some architectures do
not need all types of barriers and on such architectures, these become
noops.< / p >
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
< h5 > Example:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-26 23:44:29 +00:00
%mallocP = tail call i8* @malloc(i32 ptrtoint (i32* getelementptr (i32* null, i32 1) to i32))
%ptr = bitcast i8* %mallocP to i32*
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
store i32 4, %ptr
%result1 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:result1 = 4< / i >
call void @llvm.memory.barrier( i1 false, i1 true, i1 false, i1 false )
< i > ; guarantee the above finishes< / i >
store i32 8, %ptr < i > ; before this begins< / i >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
< / div >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< a name = "int_atomic_cmp_swap" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.cmp.swap.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.atomic.cmp.swap< / tt > on
any integer bit width and for different address spaces. Not all targets
support all bit widths however.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.cmp.swap.i8.p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < cmp> , i8 < val> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.cmp.swap.i16.p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < cmp> , i16 < val> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.cmp.swap.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < cmp> , i32 < val> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.cmp.swap.i64.p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < cmp> , i64 < val> )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This loads a value in memory and compares it to a given value. If they are
equal, it stores a new value into the memory.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < tt > llvm.atomic.cmp.swap< / tt > intrinsic takes three arguments. The result
as well as both < tt > cmp< / tt > and < tt > val< / tt > must be integer values with the
same bit width. The < tt > ptr< / tt > argument must be a pointer to a value of
this integer type. While any bit width integer may be used, targets may only
lower representations they support in hardware.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This entire intrinsic must be executed atomically. It first loads the value
in memory pointed to by < tt > ptr< / tt > and compares it with the
value < tt > cmp< / tt > . If they are equal, < tt > val< / tt > is stored into the
memory. The loaded value is yielded in all cases. This provides the
equivalent of an atomic compare-and-swap operation within the SSA
framework.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< pre >
2009-10-26 23:44:29 +00:00
%mallocP = tail call i8* @malloc(i32 ptrtoint (i32* getelementptr (i32* null, i32 1) to i32))
%ptr = bitcast i8* %mallocP to i32*
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
store i32 4, %ptr
%val1 = add i32 4, 4
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result1 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.cmp.swap.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 4, %val1 )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result1 = 4< / i >
%stored1 = icmp eq i32 %result1, 4 < i > ; yields {i1}:stored1 = true< / i >
%memval1 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:memval1 = 8< / i >
%val2 = add i32 1, 1
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result2 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.cmp.swap.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 5, %val2 )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result2 = 8< / i >
%stored2 = icmp eq i32 %result2, 5 < i > ; yields {i1}:stored2 = false< / i >
%memval2 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:memval2 = 8< / i >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_atomic_swap" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.swap.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.atomic.swap< / tt > on any
integer bit width. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.swap.i8.p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < val> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.swap.i16.p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < val> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.swap.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < val> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.swap.i64.p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < val> )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic loads the value stored in memory at < tt > ptr< / tt > and yields
the value from memory. It then stores the value in < tt > val< / tt > in the memory
at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < tt > llvm.atomic.swap< / tt > intrinsic takes two arguments. Both
the < tt > val< / tt > argument and the result must be integers of the same bit
width. The first argument, < tt > ptr< / tt > , must be a pointer to a value of this
integer type. The targets may only lower integer representations they
support.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic loads the value pointed to by < tt > ptr< / tt > , yields it, and
stores < tt > val< / tt > back into < tt > ptr< / tt > atomically. This provides the
equivalent of an atomic swap operation within the SSA framework.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-26 23:44:29 +00:00
%mallocP = tail call i8* @malloc(i32 ptrtoint (i32* getelementptr (i32* null, i32 1) to i32))
%ptr = bitcast i8* %mallocP to i32*
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
store i32 4, %ptr
%val1 = add i32 4, 4
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result1 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.swap.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 %val1 )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result1 = 4< / i >
%stored1 = icmp eq i32 %result1, 4 < i > ; yields {i1}:stored1 = true< / i >
%memval1 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:memval1 = 8< / i >
%val2 = add i32 1, 1
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result2 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.swap.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 %val2 )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result2 = 8< / i >
%stored2 = icmp eq i32 %result2, 8 < i > ; yields {i1}:stored2 = true< / i >
%memval2 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:memval2 = 2< / i >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< a name = "int_atomic_load_add" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.add.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.atomic.load.add< / tt > on
any integer bit width. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.add.i8..p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.add.i16..p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.add.i32..p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.add.i64..p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic adds < tt > delta< / tt > to the value stored in memory
at < tt > ptr< / tt > . It yields the original value at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The intrinsic takes two arguments, the first a pointer to an integer value
and the second an integer value. The result is also an integer value. These
integer types can have any bit width, but they must all have the same bit
width. The targets may only lower integer representations they support.< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic does a series of operations atomically. It first loads the
value stored at < tt > ptr< / tt > . It then adds < tt > delta< / tt > , stores the result
to < tt > ptr< / tt > . It yields the original value stored at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-26 23:44:29 +00:00
%mallocP = tail call i8* @malloc(i32 ptrtoint (i32* getelementptr (i32* null, i32 1) to i32))
%ptr = bitcast i8* %mallocP to i32*
store i32 4, %ptr
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result1 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.add.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 4 )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result1 = 4< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result2 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.add.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 2 )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result2 = 8< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result3 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.add.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 5 )
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result3 = 10< / i >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
%memval1 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:memval1 = 15< / i >
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-02-21 06:45:13 +00:00
< / div >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_sub" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.sub.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use < tt > llvm.atomic.load.sub< / tt > on
any integer bit width and for different address spaces. Not all targets
support all bit widths however.< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.sub.i8.p0i32( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.sub.i16.p0i32( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.sub.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.sub.i64.p0i32( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic subtracts < tt > delta< / tt > to the value stored in memory at
< tt > ptr< / tt > . It yields the original value at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The intrinsic takes two arguments, the first a pointer to an integer value
and the second an integer value. The result is also an integer value. These
integer types can have any bit width, but they must all have the same bit
width. The targets may only lower integer representations they support.< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic does a series of operations atomically. It first loads the
value stored at < tt > ptr< / tt > . It then subtracts < tt > delta< / tt > , stores the
result to < tt > ptr< / tt > . It yields the original value stored
at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-26 23:44:29 +00:00
%mallocP = tail call i8* @malloc(i32 ptrtoint (i32* getelementptr (i32* null, i32 1) to i32))
%ptr = bitcast i8* %mallocP to i32*
store i32 8, %ptr
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result1 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.sub.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 4 )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result1 = 8< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result2 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.sub.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 2 )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result2 = 4< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result3 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.sub.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 5 )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result3 = 2< / i >
%memval1 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:memval1 = -3< / i >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_and" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.and.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < br >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_nand" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.nand.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < br >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_or" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.or.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < br >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_xor" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.xor.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < br >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These are overloaded intrinsics. You can
use < tt > llvm.atomic.load_and< / tt > , < tt > llvm.atomic.load_nand< / tt > ,
< tt > llvm.atomic.load_or< / tt > , and < tt > llvm.atomic.load_xor< / tt > on any integer
bit width and for different address spaces. Not all targets support all bit
widths however.< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.and.i8.p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.and.i16.p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.and.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.and.i64.p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.or.i8.p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.or.i16.p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.or.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.or.i64.p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.nand.i8.p0i32( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.nand.i16.p0i32( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.nand.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.nand.i64.p0i32( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.xor.i8.p0i32( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.xor.i16.p0i32( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.xor.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.xor.i64.p0i32( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These intrinsics bitwise the operation (and, nand, or, xor) < tt > delta< / tt > to
the value stored in memory at < tt > ptr< / tt > . It yields the original value
at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These intrinsics take two arguments, the first a pointer to an integer value
and the second an integer value. The result is also an integer value. These
integer types can have any bit width, but they must all have the same bit
width. The targets may only lower integer representations they support.< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These intrinsics does a series of operations atomically. They first load the
value stored at < tt > ptr< / tt > . They then do the bitwise
operation < tt > delta< / tt > , store the result to < tt > ptr< / tt > . They yield the
original value stored at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-26 23:44:29 +00:00
%mallocP = tail call i8* @malloc(i32 ptrtoint (i32* getelementptr (i32* null, i32 1) to i32))
%ptr = bitcast i8* %mallocP to i32*
store i32 0x0F0F, %ptr
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result0 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.nand.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 0xFF )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result0 = 0x0F0F< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result1 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.and.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 0xFF )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result1 = 0xFFFFFFF0< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result2 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.or.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 0F )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result2 = 0xF0< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result3 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.xor.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 0F )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result3 = FF< / i >
%memval1 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:memval1 = F0< / i >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< / div >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_max" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.max.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < br >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_min" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.min.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < br >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_umax" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.umax.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < br >
< a name = "int_atomic_load_umin" > '< tt > llvm.atomic.load.umin.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a > < br >
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These are overloaded intrinsics. You can use < tt > llvm.atomic.load_max< / tt > ,
< tt > llvm.atomic.load_min< / tt > , < tt > llvm.atomic.load_umax< / tt > , and
< tt > llvm.atomic.load_umin< / tt > on any integer bit width and for different
address spaces. Not all targets support all bit widths however.< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< pre >
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.max.i8.p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.max.i16.p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.max.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.max.i64.p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.min.i8.p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.min.i16.p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.min.i32..p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.min.i64..p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.umax.i8.p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.umax.i16.p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.umax.i32.p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.umax.i64.p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.atomic.load.umin.i8..p0i8( i8* < ptr> , i8 < delta> )
declare i16 @llvm.atomic.load.umin.i16.p0i16( i16* < ptr> , i16 < delta> )
declare i32 @llvm.atomic.load.umin.i32..p0i32( i32* < ptr> , i32 < delta> )
declare i64 @llvm.atomic.load.umin.i64..p0i64( i64* < ptr> , i64 < delta> )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These intrinsics takes the signed or unsigned minimum or maximum of
< tt > delta< / tt > and the value stored in memory at < tt > ptr< / tt > . It yields the
original value at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These intrinsics take two arguments, the first a pointer to an integer value
and the second an integer value. The result is also an integer value. These
integer types can have any bit width, but they must all have the same bit
width. The targets may only lower integer representations they support.< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > These intrinsics does a series of operations atomically. They first load the
value stored at < tt > ptr< / tt > . They then do the signed or unsigned min or
max < tt > delta< / tt > and the value, store the result to < tt > ptr< / tt > . They
yield the original value stored at < tt > ptr< / tt > .< / p >
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< h5 > Examples:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-10-26 23:44:29 +00:00
%mallocP = tail call i8* @malloc(i32 ptrtoint (i32* getelementptr (i32* null, i32 1) to i32))
%ptr = bitcast i8* %mallocP to i32*
store i32 7, %ptr
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result0 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.min.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 -2 )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result0 = 7< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result1 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.max.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 8 )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result1 = -2< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result2 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.umin.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 10 )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result2 = 8< / i >
2008-07-30 04:36:53 +00:00
%result3 = call i32 @llvm.atomic.load.umax.i32.p0i32( i32* %ptr, i32 30 )
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< i > ; yields {i32}:result3 = 8< / i >
%memval1 = load i32* %ptr < i > ; yields {i32}:memval1 = 30< / i >
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-06-25 08:15:39 +00:00
< / div >
2008-02-16 01:24:58 +00:00
2009-10-13 07:03:23 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_memorymarkers" > Memory Use Markers< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< p > This class of intrinsics exists to information about the lifetime of memory
objects and ranges where variables are immutable.< / p >
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_lifetime_start" > '< tt > llvm.lifetime.start< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
declare void @llvm.lifetime.start(i64 < size> , i8* nocapture < ptr> )
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.lifetime.start< / tt > ' intrinsic specifies the start of a memory
object's lifetime.< / p >
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-10-13 07:57:33 +00:00
< p > The first argument is a constant integer representing the size of the
object, or -1 if it is variable sized. The second argument is a pointer to
the object.< / p >
2009-10-13 07:03:23 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > This intrinsic indicates that before this point in the code, the value of the
memory pointed to by < tt > ptr< / tt > is dead. This means that it is known to
2009-10-27 16:56:58 +00:00
never be used and has an undefined value. A load from the pointer that
precedes this intrinsic can be replaced with
2009-10-13 07:03:23 +00:00
< tt > '< a href = "#undefvalues" > undef< / a > '< / tt > .< / p >
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_lifetime_end" > '< tt > llvm.lifetime.end< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
declare void @llvm.lifetime.end(i64 < size> , i8* nocapture < ptr> )
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.lifetime.end< / tt > ' intrinsic specifies the end of a memory
object's lifetime.< / p >
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-10-13 07:57:33 +00:00
< p > The first argument is a constant integer representing the size of the
object, or -1 if it is variable sized. The second argument is a pointer to
the object.< / p >
2009-10-13 07:03:23 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > This intrinsic indicates that after this point in the code, the value of the
memory pointed to by < tt > ptr< / tt > is dead. This means that it is known to
never be used and has an undefined value. Any stores into the memory object
following this intrinsic may be removed as dead.
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_invariant_start" > '< tt > llvm.invariant.start< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
declare {}* @llvm.invariant.start(i64 < size> , i8* nocapture < ptr> ) readonly
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.invariant.start< / tt > ' intrinsic specifies that the contents of
a memory object will not change.< / p >
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-10-13 07:57:33 +00:00
< p > The first argument is a constant integer representing the size of the
object, or -1 if it is variable sized. The second argument is a pointer to
the object.< / p >
2009-10-13 07:03:23 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > This intrinsic indicates that until an < tt > llvm.invariant.end< / tt > that uses
the return value, the referenced memory location is constant and
unchanging.< / p >
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_invariant_end" > '< tt > llvm.invariant.end< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
declare void @llvm.invariant.end({}* < start> , i64 < size> , i8* nocapture < ptr> )
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The '< tt > llvm.invariant.end< / tt > ' intrinsic specifies that the contents of
a memory object are mutable.< / p >
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The first argument is the matching < tt > llvm.invariant.start< / tt > intrinsic.
2009-10-13 07:57:33 +00:00
The second argument is a constant integer representing the size of the
object, or -1 if it is variable sized and the third argument is a pointer
to the object.< / p >
2009-10-13 07:03:23 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > This intrinsic indicates that the memory is mutable again.< / p >
< / div >
2007-06-15 20:50:54 +00:00
<!-- ======================================================================= -->
< div class = "doc_subsection" >
< a name = "int_general" > General Intrinsics< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This class of intrinsics is designed to be generic and has no specific
purpose.< / p >
2007-06-15 20:50:54 +00:00
< / div >
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_var_annotation" > '< tt > llvm.var.annotation< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2007-06-18 23:42:37 +00:00
declare void @llvm.var.annotation(i8* < val> , i8* < str> , i8* < str> , i32 < int> )
2007-06-15 20:50:54 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.var.annotation< / tt > ' intrinsic.< / p >
2007-06-15 20:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first argument is a pointer to a value, the second is a pointer to a
global string, the third is a pointer to a global string which is the source
file name, and the last argument is the line number.< / p >
2007-06-15 20:50:54 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic allows annotation of local variables with arbitrary strings.
This can be useful for special purpose optimizations that want to look for
these annotations. These have no other defined use, they are ignored by code
generation and optimization.< / p >
2007-06-15 20:50:54 +00:00
< / div >
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2007-09-21 23:57:59 +00:00
< a name = "int_annotation" > '< tt > llvm.annotation.*< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This is an overloaded intrinsic. You can use '< tt > llvm.annotation< / tt > ' on
any integer bit width.< / p >
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
< pre >
2007-09-22 00:03:01 +00:00
declare i8 @llvm.annotation.i8(i8 < val> , i8* < str> , i8* < str> , i32 < int> )
declare i16 @llvm.annotation.i16(i16 < val> , i8* < str> , i8* < str> , i32 < int> )
declare i32 @llvm.annotation.i32(i32 < val> , i8* < str> , i8* < str> , i32 < int> )
declare i64 @llvm.annotation.i64(i64 < val> , i8* < str> , i8* < str> , i32 < int> )
declare i256 @llvm.annotation.i256(i256 < val> , i8* < str> , i8* < str> , i32 < int> )
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.annotation< / tt > ' intrinsic.< / p >
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The first argument is an integer value (result of some expression), the
second is a pointer to a global string, the third is a pointer to a global
string which is the source file name, and the last argument is the line
number. It returns the value of the first argument.< / p >
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic allows annotations to be put on arbitrary expressions with
arbitrary strings. This can be useful for special purpose optimizations that
want to look for these annotations. These have no other defined use, they
are ignored by code generation and optimization.< / p >
2007-09-21 22:59:12 +00:00
< / div >
2007-03-14 19:31:19 +00:00
2008-01-15 22:31:34 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_trap" > '< tt > llvm.trap< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
declare void @llvm.trap()
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The '< tt > llvm.trap< / tt > ' intrinsic.< / p >
2008-01-15 22:31:34 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > None.< / p >
2008-01-15 22:31:34 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsics is lowered to the target dependent trap instruction. If the
target does not have a trap instruction, this intrinsic will be lowered to
the call of the < tt > abort()< / tt > function.< / p >
2008-01-15 22:31:34 +00:00
< / div >
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
2008-11-22 23:55:29 +00:00
< a name = "int_stackprotector" > '< tt > llvm.stackprotector< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
< / div >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
< div class = "doc_text" >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
declare void @llvm.stackprotector( i8* < guard> , i8** < slot> )
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
< / pre >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < tt > llvm.stackprotector< / tt > intrinsic takes the < tt > guard< / tt > and
stores it onto the stack at < tt > slot< / tt > . The stack slot is adjusted to
ensure that it is placed on the stack before local variables.< / p >
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > The < tt > llvm.stackprotector< / tt > intrinsic requires two pointer
arguments. The first argument is the value loaded from the stack
guard < tt > @__stack_chk_guard< / tt > . The second variable is an < tt > alloca< / tt >
that has enough space to hold the value of the guard.< / p >
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
2009-07-20 02:29:24 +00:00
< p > This intrinsic causes the prologue/epilogue inserter to force the position of
the < tt > AllocaInst< / tt > stack slot to be before local variables on the
stack. This is to ensure that if a local variable on the stack is
overwritten, it will destroy the value of the guard. When the function exits,
the guard on the stack is checked against the original guard. If they're
different, then the program aborts by calling the < tt > __stack_chk_fail()< / tt >
function.< / p >
2008-11-19 05:56:17 +00:00
< / div >
2009-11-30 08:03:53 +00:00
<!-- _______________________________________________________________________ -->
< div class = "doc_subsubsection" >
< a name = "int_objectsize" > '< tt > llvm.objectsize< / tt > ' Intrinsic< / a >
< / div >
< div class = "doc_text" >
< h5 > Syntax:< / h5 >
< pre >
declare i32 @llvm.objectsize.i32( i8* < ptr> , i32 < type> )
declare i64 @llvm.objectsize.i64( i8* < ptr> , i32 < type> )
< / pre >
< h5 > Overview:< / h5 >
< p > The < tt > llvm.objectsize< / tt > intrinsic returns the constant number of bytes
2009-12-01 22:28:41 +00:00
from < tt > ptr< / tt > to the end of the object < tt > ptr< / tt > points to, if it
2009-11-30 08:03:53 +00:00
can deduce this at compile time. If there are any side-effects in evaluating
the argument or it cannot deduce which objects < tt > ptr< / tt > points to at compile
2009-12-01 22:28:41 +00:00
time, the intrinsic returns < tt > i32/i64 -1< / tt > for < tt > type< / tt > 0
or 1 and < tt > i32/i64 0< / tt > for < tt > type< / tt > 2 or 3.< / p >
2009-11-30 08:03:53 +00:00
< h5 > Arguments:< / h5 >
< p > The < tt > llvm.objectsize< / tt > intrinsic takes two arguments. The first
2009-12-01 22:28:41 +00:00
argument is a pointer to the object < tt > ptr< / tt > . The second argument
is an integer < tt > type< / tt > which ranges from 0 to 3. The first bit
corresponds to a return value based on whole objects, and the second bit
whether or not we return the maximum or minimum remaining bytes computed.< / p >
2009-11-30 08:03:53 +00:00
< h5 > Semantics:< / h5 >
< p > The < tt > llvm.objectsize< / tt > intrinsic is lowered to either a constant
2009-12-01 22:28:41 +00:00
representing the size of the object concerned or < tt > i32/i64 -1< / tt > if
2009-11-30 08:03:53 +00:00
it cannot be determined at compile time.< / p >
< / div >
2001-06-06 20:29:01 +00:00
<!-- *********************************************************************** -->
< hr >
2004-03-01 17:47:27 +00:00
< address >
< a href = "http://jigsaw.w3.org/css-validator/check/referer" > < img
2008-12-11 17:34:48 +00:00
src="http://jigsaw.w3.org/css-validator/images/vcss-blue" alt="Valid CSS">< / a >
2004-03-01 17:47:27 +00:00
< a href = "http://validator.w3.org/check/referer" > < img
2008-12-11 17:34:48 +00:00
src="http://www.w3.org/Icons/valid-html401-blue" alt="Valid HTML 4.01">< / a >
2004-03-01 17:47:27 +00:00
< a href = "mailto:sabre@nondot.org" > Chris Lattner< / a > < br >
2006-03-14 05:39:39 +00:00
< a href = "http://llvm.org" > The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure< / a > < br >
2004-03-01 17:47:27 +00:00
Last modified: $Date$
< / address >
2008-01-04 04:33:49 +00:00
2003-11-08 01:05:38 +00:00
< / body >
< / html >
